Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
Innovation
from
ABB
COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT
THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL
PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN
PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD
PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN
CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY
REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS
BELOW.
THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR
THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE
DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN
THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO
ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST
TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT
THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW
PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT.
Manufacturer:
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1
Introduction.......................................................................9
Introduction to the application manual................................................9
About the complete set of manuals for an IED..............................9
About the application manual......................................................10
Intended audience.......................................................................10
Related documents......................................................................11
Revision notes.............................................................................11
Section 2
Section 3
Requirements.................................................................39
Current transformer requirements....................................................39
Current transformer classification................................................39
Conditions....................................................................................40
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Table of contents
Fault current................................................................................41
Secondary wire resistance and additional load...........................41
General current transformer requirements..................................41
Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements........................42
Busbar protection...................................................................42
Breaker failure protection.......................................................43
Non-directional instantaneous and definitive time, phase
and residual overcurrent protection........................................44
Non-directional inverse time delayed phase and residual
overcurrent protection............................................................44
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other
standards.....................................................................................45
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1,
class P, PR.............................................................................45
Current transformers according to IEC 60044-1, class PX,
IEC 60044-6, class TPS
(and old British Standard, class X).........................................46
Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE.......................46
SNTP server requirements...............................................................47
Section 4
IED application...............................................................49
General IED application....................................................................49
Analog inputs....................................................................................51
Application...................................................................................51
Setting guidelines........................................................................52
Setting of the phase reference channel..................................52
Setting parameters......................................................................76
Local human-machine interface.......................................................78
Human machine interface............................................................78
LHMI related functions.................................................................81
Introduction.............................................................................81
General setting parameters....................................................81
Indication LEDs...........................................................................82
Introduction.............................................................................82
Setting parameters.................................................................82
Basic IED functions..........................................................................84
Self supervision with internal event list........................................84
Application..............................................................................84
Setting parameters.................................................................85
Time synchronization...................................................................85
Application..............................................................................85
Setting guidelines...................................................................86
Setting parameters.................................................................87
Parameter setting groups............................................................90
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Table of contents
Application..............................................................................90
Setting guidelines...................................................................90
Setting parameters.................................................................90
Test mode functionality................................................................91
Application..............................................................................91
Setting guidelines...................................................................91
Setting parameters.................................................................91
IED identifiers..............................................................................92
Application..............................................................................92
Setting parameters.................................................................93
Rated system frequency (RFR)...................................................93
Application..............................................................................93
Setting guidelines...................................................................93
Setting parameters.................................................................93
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI).........................................93
Application..............................................................................93
Setting guidelines...................................................................94
Setting parameters.................................................................94
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO).....................................94
Application..............................................................................94
Setting guidelines...................................................................94
Setting parameters.................................................................94
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI).............................................94
Application..............................................................................94
Setting guidelines...................................................................94
Setting parameters.................................................................95
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)........................................95
Application..............................................................................95
Setting guidelines...................................................................95
Setting parameters.................................................................98
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph).......................................100
Application............................................................................100
Setting guidelines.................................................................100
Setting parameters...............................................................101
Authority status (AUTS).............................................................101
Application............................................................................101
Setting parameters...............................................................102
Goose binary receive.................................................................102
Setting parameters...............................................................102
Differential protection......................................................................102
Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B).................................102
Basic applications.................................................................103
Busbar protection applications.............................................103
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Table of contents
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Table of contents
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Table of contents
Application............................................................................277
Setting guidelines.................................................................277
Event recorder (RDRE).............................................................278
Application............................................................................278
Setting guidelines.................................................................278
Trip value recorder (RDRE).......................................................278
Application............................................................................278
Setting guidelines.................................................................279
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)...................................................279
Application............................................................................279
Setting guidelines.................................................................280
Section 5
Station communication.................................................281
Overview.........................................................................................281
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................281
Application IEC 61850-8-1.........................................................281
Setting guidelines......................................................................283
Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................283
Application............................................................................283
Setting guidelines.................................................................283
Setting parameters...............................................................283
Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................283
Application............................................................................283
Setting guidelines.................................................................284
Setting parameters...............................................................284
Setting parameters....................................................................284
LON communication protocol.........................................................285
Application.................................................................................285
Setting parameters....................................................................286
SPA communication protocol.........................................................287
Application.................................................................................287
Setting guidelines......................................................................289
Setting parameters....................................................................289
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................290
Application.................................................................................290
Setting parameters....................................................................296
Automation bits (AUBI)...................................................................300
Application.................................................................................300
Setting guidelines......................................................................300
Setting parameters....................................................................300
Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................315
Application.................................................................................315
Setting guidelines......................................................................317
Setting parameters....................................................................318
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Table of contents
Section 6
Remote communication................................................321
Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................321
Application.................................................................................321
Communication hardware solutions.....................................322
Application possibility with one-phase REB 670..................323
Setting guidelines......................................................................324
Setting parameters....................................................................325
Section 7
Configuration................................................................329
Introduction.....................................................................................329
Description of configuration REB 670.............................................329
Description of 3 ph variant A20.................................................329
Description of 3 ph variant A31.................................................329
Description of 1 ph variants B20 and B21.................................329
Description of 1 ph variant B31.................................................330
Available configurations for pre-configured REB 670................330
Configuration #1 Called X01......................................................330
Configuration #2 Called X02......................................................331
Configuration #3 Called X03......................................................331
Section 8
Glossary.......................................................................333
Glossary.........................................................................................333
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
About this chapter
This chapter introduces the user to the manual as such.
1.1
1.1.1
Technical
reference
manual
Installation and
commissioning
manual
Operators
manual
Engineering
guide
en06000097.vsd
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Section 1
Introduction
The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the
IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED
670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read
disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third
part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670
products and the PCM 600 tool.
The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850
station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600
and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor
and how to set up projects and communication.
1.1.2
1.1.3
The chapter Engineering of the IED describes the overall procedure regarding
the engineering process of an IED.
The chapter Requirements describes current and voltage transformer
requirements.
The chapter IED application describes the use of the included software
functions in the IED. The chapter discuss application possibilities and gives
guidelines for calculating settings for a particular application.
The chapter Station communication describes the communication possibilities
in a SA-system.
The chapter Remote communication describes the remote end data
communication possibilities through binary signal transferring.
The chapter Configuration describes the preconfiguration of the IED and its
complements.
The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in
ABB technical documentation.
Intended audience
General
The application manual is addressing the system engineer/technical responsible who
is responsible for specifying the application of the IED.
Requirements
The system engineer/technical responsible must have a good knowledge about
protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured
functional logics in the protection.
10
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 1
Introduction
1.1.4
Related documents
Documents related to REB 670
Identity number
Operators manual
Application manual
Buyers guide
SPA and LON signal list for IED 670, ver. 1.1
IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670, ver. 1.1
1KHA001027-UEN
1MRS755552
1.1.5
Revision notes
Revision
B
REB 670
Description
No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
11
12
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Section 2
2.1
Introduction
The IED 670 includes all the necessary functions to build any application.
The functions are available in a software library and there is a basic library of
functions always included in any supply that are sufficient for most applications.
For special applications there is a number of software options which must be ordered
separately.
The function library with available basic functions and options are shown in figure
below.
To allow applications on different voltage levels and station arrangements there is
also a choice of hardware to be included. The IED can be ordered in 1/1 resp 1/2 size
19 rack with 6U height cases and with a small or medium size HMI as a local user
interface.
The cases can be mounted in 19 rack, flushed or wall mounted as preferred.
The engineering is done with use of the PCM 600 engineering toolbox.
Install the PCM 600 toolbox with the connectivity package for IED 670 series and
open it from the Start menu or from the short-cut on the desktop.
The PCM 600 platform includes following components:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
13
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
2.1.1
Figure 1:
The hardware also includes e.g. the configurable LEDs and the remote end line data
communication module LDCM. These are also important parts of the physical
interface and will be shown with the signal matrix tool.
The graphical configuration includes a number of virtual elements forming the
interface between the software functions and the hardware. These function blocks are
configured at all interface points where a physical IO is foreseen to be required.
These virtual IO blocks are:
14
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Figure 2 shows an example for RET 670 of these function blocks configured for use
in the signal matrix tool.
en05000530.vsd
Figure 2:
These function blocks will, as the graphical configuration has been compiled, showup in the signal matrix tool when this has been opened. The use of the Signal Matrix
tool is described below.
2.1.1.1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
15
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
2.1.1.2
16
The function block can be used for voltage inputs or current inputs. Which of the
two is defined as a setting parameter (TYPE input) on the function block.
The output AI3P is a general output for all of the phases. It is normally connected
to the functions. The only difference is the Disturbance recorder block where the
individual channels are connected to individual channels. The four individual
outputs are the three phases and the neutral where the neutral is residually
summated from the phases if no physical connection is made to the fourth input
with the signal matrix tool. If the physical connection is made the physical input
is used instead. When e.g. a neutral overcurrent protection is connected to the
function block output AI3P it will measure the fourth neutral channel. For each
application it can then be decided if this is the residual sum or e.g. if a neutral
current transformer is connected there.
The physical inputs can be connected phase-phase instead of phase to neutral,
where acceptable. The setting of the pre-processing block (under Settings/
GeneralSettings/Analog modules/3PhaseAnalogGroup) Connection Type must
then be set to Phase to phase. The pre-processing block will then use the physical
values as phase to phase values and calculate the phase to neutral values.
The name of the pre-processing block and the names of the four inputs are the
names shown on the signal matrix tool and the function block name should be
selected for simple understanding what the input means.
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
en05000531.vsd
Figure 3:
The analog pre-processing blocks can also be configured to have the correct frequency
tracking for DFT caculations (i.e. adapt to the signal frequency). This is included in
the SMAI function blocks. Each block in a task time group is provided with a
possibility to keep track of the frequency for adjustment of the fouriers filter to the
correct frequency. In principle each block in the series should have the DFT ref setting
for the group set to preferable group positive sequence voltage input, e.g. if
DFTReference for PR01 is set to AdDFTRefCh7, the PRO7 positive sequence voltage
frequency will then be the frequency reference for group 1. If SMAI block for other
task times (e.g.13-24 resp 25-36) also are included they can be given the same
reference by connecting the output SPFCOUT to input DFTSPSC on the function
blocks SMAI 13 resp 25. Function blocks within these task time groups must then
have setting e.g. DFTReference=ExternalDFTRef.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
17
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
The first function block in the task time group containing the function block sending
the signal must have the setting of the DFT reference output set to e.g.
DFTRefExtOut= AdDFTRefCh7.
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default
value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
2.2
Configuration alternatives
There are four different software alternatives with which the IED can be managed.
The intention is that these configurations shall suit most applications with minor or
no changes.
The configurations are:
The Multi breaker arrangement includes One- and a half, Double breaker and Ring
breaker arrangements.
The number of IO must be ordered to the application where more IO is foreseen for
the Single phase tripping arrangements along with Multi-breaker arrangement.
The basic ordering includes one Binary input module (16 inputs) and one Binary
Output module (24 outputs), sufficient for the default configured IO to trip and close
circuit breaker and with possible communication interface.
Each of the four alternative solutions is of course possible to re-configure to an userdefined configuration.
Optional functions and optional IO ordered will not be configured at delivery. As the
standard delivered hardware only includes one binary input and one binary output
module only the key functions such as tripping are connected to the outputs in the
signal matrix tool.
The required total IO must be calculated and specified at ordering and the IO adapted
with help of the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT).
Typical connection diagrams are provided in following appendices available in
separate documents, refer to section "Related documents"
18
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
1MRK002801-BA
1MRK002801-CA
1MRK002801-DA
1MRK002801-EA
The diagrams show an example of how to connect the primary apparatuses to the IED
when also the control functionality is required. It is intended as a reference for the
alternative applications. As there normally is two sub-systems and not always all
functions in both there is a need for exchange of data between the sub-systems. The
configurations are prepared to cover for the most common applications but not all
possibilities.
The Application configuration tool CAP 531, which is part of the PCM600
engineering platform, will further to the four arrangements above include also
alternatives for each of them with all of the software options configured. These can
then be used directly or as assistance where only minor adaptation will be necessary.
The detailed configuration diagrams are available in separate documents, refer to
section "Related documents"
The configurations are as far as found necessary provided with application comments
to explain why the signals have been connected in the special way. This is of course
for the special application features created not standard functionality.
2.3
2.3.1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
19
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Open the Signal Matrix Tool by a right click on the IED in the Plant structure of PCM
600.
The physical IO will show up on the horizontal axis and the virtual IO on the vertical
axis. The user has then full freedom for each application to connect the virtual signal
from the graphical configuration to analog or digital IO. The physical IO is set up
under Application configuration tool in menu Edit/Function selector.
In this menu the included IO boards is edited and must match the ordered hardware.
It is commonly required that this menu is edited, the configuration compiled and
downloaded and then the PST tool can be used to connect the physical inputs with
the virtual IO.
This is done by entering an X at the connection point between the two.
One virtual signal on the vertical axis can be connected to several physical binary IO.
One analog input may also be connected to several preprocessing elements for the
analog signals.
Figure 4:
20
Example (RET 670) from signal matrix tool tabs for binary input defines the connection between
the physical and virtual IO.
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
This gives the user flexibility to connect any signal he needs to an IO without doing
any changes in the graphical configuration. To allow full flexibility a number of
logically prepared signals has also been generated.
2.3.2
en05000532.vsd
Figure 5:
2.4
2.4.1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
21
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Procedure
1.
Open the configuration program CAP 531 under the PCM 600 platform by
opening Start/Programs/ABB/PCM 600.
The below view will show up.
Figure 6:
2.
3.
22
Start the configuration tool under the menu or by clicking the wrench symbol.
In the configuration tool open the template to start from under Edit. Note that
the IED has default configuration as ordered, open the correct or a more suitable
alternative template.
Default password is abb
Information on how to log on as an administrators is available in Operator's
manual. Please refer to section "Related documents".
The template will be installed and you can see the worksheets used in the
template.
Open the worksheets to be addition. Check in the configuration diagrams and
verify what you need to change e.g. logic added or IO signals modification.
Following guidelines can be given.
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
New function blocks are added by selecting the function from the function
library. It is also possible to copy an existing one by marking it and copying it
using Ctrl+C.
The following view is shown.
Figure 7:
4.
5.
The new function block is selected and added to the worksheet. Note that all
inputs needs to be connected either with a signal or with a True (On) or False
(Off) signal.
Click the input and take key v or click the var symbol to add a variable on
an input or output.
Type the name you want to use for the signal. Type True or False for fixed On
or Off.
This is defined on the outputs On-Off for binary status on the
Fixed signals function block. The designations there must be
used for fixed binary status.
6.
REB 670
If the input shall be connected to the output on a function close by, take the line
tool and connect the two.
In case the connection inputs and outputs are in different sheets, variables names
will be used and with the same variable name you connect inputs and outputs.
An output can be connected to several inputs, e.g. on IO boards, on Trip function
block, on an OR, AND or TIMER function block etc.
Inputs cannot be connected to several places without an OR gate.
When you select your function blocks e.g. logic elements to build a logic you
must, for high speed circuits, keep track of the processing order. The processing
number is shown on each function block. A sequence should have raising task
numbers not to loose one processor loop, e.g. 1, 3, 8 or even 100 ms.
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
23
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
7.
8.
9.
2.4.2
You can copy and paste variables and function blocks/logic elements. You will
at pasting of e.g. an OR gate be requested to select the new one with the correct
sequence number.
When you are satisfied with the logic you have created, save, close and click on
the IED symbol and Compile the configuration.
You will then get warnings and errors for all mistakes. All errors must be
corrected, warnings can be checked to see if they are acceptable, mostly due to
connection of function blocks with different cycle times.
Click on the Errors and Warnings in the Error list to directly open the worksheet
where the problem is found. Correct all mistakes, save and compile again.
When no errors occur, download the configuration to the IED.
You must have the correct IP address and you must have either a straight
Ethernet cable with a HUB in between or a crossed Ethernet cable when you
are directly connected PC-IED.
2.4.3
2.5
24
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
The function block includes a definition how many setting groups are used to prevent
switching to a not set group.
The local setting can be blocked after commissioning by activating a digital input or
from SA system as defined in the configuration. Default there is a software switch
which can be set to block the setting from the HMI.
Figure 8:
2.6
Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are
accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept
of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based
on the following facts:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
25
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different
areas of the IED and tools functionality; the pre-defined user types are defined
as follows:
User type
Access rights
Guest
Read only
SuperUser
Full access
SPAGuest
SystemOperator
ProtectionEngineer
All settings
DesignEngineer
UserAdministrator
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management
Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of
the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.
2.6.1
26
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Figure 9:
By left-clicking on the IED Users submenu, the tool will open in the right-side
panel:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
27
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Figure 10:
By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate
the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User
Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users
and Groups existent in the IED.
If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing
settings in the User Management Tool database.
Even if the administrator empties the tool database, the users
previously defined are still in the IED. They cannot be erased by
downloading the empty list into the IED (the tool wont download an
empty list), so it is strongly recommended that before you create any
user you create one that belongs to the SuperUser group.
If the administrator marks the check box User must logon to this IED, then the
fields under the User Management tab are becoming accessible and one can add,
delete and edit users.
To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black
arrow, see figure 11 on the User subtab:
28
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Figure 11:
Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter
details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing Next and
advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:
Figure 12:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
29
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Figure 13:
Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there
are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 14
Figure 14:
No. Description
1
Change password
The Group subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details
of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:
30
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Figure 15:
It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in
the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the Users subtab.
The Functions subtab is a descriptional area, showing in detail what Read/Write
permissions has each user group, in respect to various tools and components.
Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means
of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as
from the other tools:
No. Description
REB 670
Download to IED
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
31
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
2.6.2
2.7
32
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Disconnectable terminal
or key-switch
ChangeLock
en05000754.vsd
Figure 16:
Blocking of setting
For example, the COMBIFLEX key selector or an FT switch can be used for this
purpose.
2.8
en05000537.vsd
Figure 17:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
33
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
2.9
2.9.1
Voltage selection
The Busbar voltage must in many cases be used as reference for line or bay protection.
Examples are:
Line distance protection where the busbar is provided with three phase voltage
transformers and the lines with only single-phase sets for Synchronism check
reference.
The Synchronism check function in IED 670 has a built-in voltage
selection.
Bus voltage protection e.g. Over- and Undervoltage, Over- and Underfrequency
protection functions in the bay.
Voltage reference for metering functions - where three phase voltage transformers
does not exist on the object.
A voltage selection can be created in IED 670 with a user defined logic where
positions of disconnectors (and breakers) are used to create the required voltage
selection.
An example is shown in figure 18 where the voltage transformers for a double bus
system are connected to the line protection function, which may be line distance relays
or voltage or frequency relays.
Supervision of the fuse/MCB failures can be fed through the same logic and connected
to e.g. block operation of undervoltage functions.
It is also a possible to block functions when both disconnectors are open.
34
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
Figure 18:
2.9.2
The voltage selection logic for busbar voltage transformers in a double bus arrangement.
2.9.3
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
35
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
bus and transformer voltage and the use of Synchronism check device to control the
closing.
An advanced alternative exists for generating stations where the unit transformer
supplies will need to synchronize at switching and this synchronizing is done on a
decaying bus voltage on voltage level as well as frequency level depending on the
available synchronous and asynchronous machines maintaining the bus voltage.
It shall be noticed that the exchange of information between IEDs of the two
transformers can be with peer- to-peer communication across IEC61850-8-1 or over
LON bus as alternative to a hardwire connection. With the fast Goose IO transfer
times are in the level 4 ms which is sufficient also for this type of logic. Detailed
pictures are not shown here for want of space. Please contact ABB for more details
on such special logic schemes.
2.10
36
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
2.11
Engineering checklist
2.11.1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Set the IED with use of the PCM 600 Parameter Setting Tool PST.
Adjust the setting to the values suitable for your application.
Remember to also do the general settings. General setting values have only one
set and are the basic parameters such as CT and VT ratios etc.
Download to the IED, you can download from any level in your structure but
ensure to download all parts.
The active setting group function block ACGR has a setting
parameter where the number of setting groups in use can be set.
This is important and will minimize the risk of someone
switching to a setting group which has not been verified at
commissioning. The default setting is use of one group and this
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
37
Section 2
Engineering of the IED
setting will also decide how many setting groups are initiated in
the parameter setting menu.
9.
Test the IED. Use the Debug tool in the CAP 531 configuration tool to see online the status of digital signals.
This simplifies the evaluation. Note that faults need to be put on continuously
to follow a fault signal as the debug update time is on second level.
10. Check also Measurements/Functions where each function measured result can
be seen.
This shows mistakes in CT or VT settings, mistakes in setting function ON-OFF
etc. If values do not show up the most probably reason is that it is OFF, secondly
it can be incorrect configured. If the function is ON, open the CAP, not in debug
mode, and upload options from the relay.
11. Click the Red-Green Leaf and update the function block from the occurring list.
You will notice if e.g. the function has not been ordered as it will not show up
as available.
12. Save, Compile and download again.
If that does not take care of the problem, contact ABB SA-T Supportline.
Exercise caution when high currents are applied which might
thermally stress the relay.
38
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
Section 3
Requirements
About this chapter
This chapter describes current and voltage transformer requirements.
3.1
3.1.1
The high remanence type has no limit for the remanent flux. This CT has a magnetic
core without any airgap and a remanent flux might remain almost infinite time. In
this type of transformers the remanence can be up to around 80% of the saturation
flux. Typical examples of high remanence type CT are class P, PX, TPS, TPX
according to IEC, class P, X according to BS (old British Standard) and nongapped
class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE.
The low remanence type has a specified limit for the remanent flux. This CT is made
with a small airgap to reduce the remanence to a level that does not exceed 10% of
the saturation flux. The small airgap has only very limited influence on the other
properties of the CT. Class PR, TPY according to IEC are low remanence type CTs.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
39
Section 3
Requirements
The non remanence type CT has practically negligible level of remanent flux. This
type of CT has relatively big airgaps in order to reduce the remanence to practically
zero level. In the same time, these airgaps reduce the influence of the DC-component
from the primary fault current. The airgaps will also decrease the measuring accuracy
in the non-saturated region of operation. Class TPZ according to IEC is a non
remanence type CT.
Different standards and classes specify the saturation e.m.f. in different ways but it
is possible to approximately compare values from different classes. The rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044 6 standard is
used to specify the CT requirements for IED 670. The requirements are also specified
according to other standards.
3.1.2
Conditions
The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator.
The current transformer models are representative for current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type. The results may not always be valid for non
remanence type CTs (TPZ).
The performances of the protection functions have been checked in the range from
symmetrical to fully asymmetrical fault currents. Primary time constants of at least
120 ms have been considered at the tests. The current requirements below are thus
applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
Depending on the protection function phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase and three-phase
faults have been tested for different relevant fault positions e.g. close in forward and
reverse faults, zone 1 reach faults, internal and external faults. The dependability and
security of the protection was verified by checking e.g. time delays, unwanted
operations, directionality, overreach and stability.
The remanence in the current transformer core can cause unwanted operations or
minor additional time delays for some protection functions. As unwanted operations
are not acceptable at all maximum remanence has been considered for fault cases
critical for the security, e.g. faults in reverse direction and external faults. Because of
the almost negligible risk of additional time delays and the non-existent risk of failure
to operate the remanence have not been considered for the dependability cases. The
requirements below are therefore fully valid for all normal applications.
It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence
to avoid the minor risk of an additional time delay. They depend on the performance
and economy requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (e.g.
TPY, PR) are used, normally no additional margin is needed. For current transformers
of high remanence type (e.g. P, PX, TPS, TPX) the small probability of fully
asymmetrical faults, together with high remanence in the same direction as the flux
generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin.
Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at
approximately zero voltage (0). Investigations have shown that 95% of the faults in
40
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
the network will occur when the voltage is between 40 and 90. In addition fully
asymmetrical fault current will not exist in all phases at the same time.
3.1.3
Fault current
The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for
faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults
or single-phase-to-earth faults. The current for a single phase-to-earth fault will
exceed the current for a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the
total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance.
When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current for
the relevant fault position should be used and therefore both fault types have to be
considered.
3.1.4
3.1.5
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
41
Section 3
Requirements
The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very
sensitive setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive
setting of this function will be used it is recommended that the current transformer
should have an accuracy class which have an current error at rated primary current
that is less than 1% (e.g. 5P). If current transformers with less accuracy are used it
is advisable to check the actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.
3.1.6
3.1.6.1
Busbar protection
The main CT requirement for REB 670 is that the CT do not saturate within 2 ms
after fault current zero crossing.
The CT can be of high remanence or low remanence type and they can be used together
within the same zone of protection. Each of them must have a rated equivalent
secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the required secondary e.m.f.
Ealreq below:
I sn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 1)
I sn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 2)
where
Ifmax
Ipn
Isn
42
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
Ir
RCT
RL
The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). The loop resistance
containing the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed
systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in
high impedance earthed systems.
SR
The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for
Ir=1 A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A.
3.1.6.2
I sn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 3)
E al E alreq = 5 I op
Isn
I pn
S
R CT + R L + R2
Ir
(Equation 4)
where:
REB 670
Iop
Ipn
Isn
Ir
RCT
RL
The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing
the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed systems. The resistance
of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance earthed systems.
SR
The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and
SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
43
Section 3
Requirements
3.1.6.3
E al E alreq = 1, 5 I op
Isn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 5)
where:
3.1.6.4
Iop
Ipn
Isn
Ir
RCT
RL
The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing
the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed systems. The resistance
of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance earthed systems.
SR
The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and
SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A
E al E alreq = 20 I op
Isn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 6)
where
Iop
The primary current set value of the inverse time function (A)
Ipn
Isn
Ir
44
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
RCT
RL
The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance
containing the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed
systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be used for faults in
high impedance earthed systems.
SR
The burden of an IED 670 current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for
Ir=1 A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A
Independent of the value of Iop the maximum required Eal is specified according to
the following:
Isn
S
R CT + R L + R2
I pn
Ir
(Equation 7)
where
Ikmax
3.1.7
3.1.7.1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
(Equation 8)
45
Section 3
Requirements
3.1.7.2
3.1.7.3
(Equation 9)
where:
ZbANSI
The impedance (i.e. complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C class
(W)
UANSI
The CTs according to class C must have a calculated rated equivalent limiting
secondary e.m.f. EalANSI that fulfills the following:
E alANSI > max imum of E alreq
(Equation 11)
46
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
(Equation 12)
REB 670
Section 3
Requirements
3.2
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
47
48
Section 4
IED application
Section 4
IED application
About this chapter
This chapter describes the use of the included software functions in the IED. The
chapter discuss application possibilities and gives guidelines for calculating settings
for a particular application.
4.1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
49
Section 4
IED application
Differential protection zones in REB 670 include a sensitive operational level. This
sensitive operational level is designed to be able to detect internal busbar
earthground faults in low impedance earthed power systems (i.e. power systems
where the earth-fault current is limited to a certain level, typically between 300A and
2000A primary by a neutral point reactor or resistor). Alternatively this sensitive
level can be used when high sensitivity is required from busbar differential protection
(i.e. energizing of the bus via long line).
Overall operating characteristic of the differential function in REB 670 is shown in
the following figure.
Id [Primary Amps]
Sensitive
differential
protection
I in
I d=
Operate
region
Differential protection
operation characteristic
Diff Oper Level
Sensitive Oper Level
Figure 19:
Integrated overall check zone feature, independent from any disconnector position,
is available. It can be used in double busbar stations to secure stability of the busbar
differential protection in case of entirely wrong status indication of busbar
disconnector in any of the feeder bays.
Flexible, software based dynamic Zone Selection enables easy and fast adaptation to
the most common substation arrangements such as single busbar with or without
transfer bus, double busbar with or without transfer bus, one-and-a-half
breakerstations, double busbar-double breaker stations, ring busbars, etc. The
software based dynamic Zone Selections ensures:
50
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.2
Analog inputs
4.2.1
Application
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations
the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring
and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must
be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using
primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well.
Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current
and voltage transformers.
In order to make Service Values reading easier it is possible to define a reference
PhaseAngleRef. Then this analog channels phase angle will be always fixed to zero
degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
51
Section 4
IED application
During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be freely
change in order to facilitate testing and service values reading.
VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of
Transformer Input Module (TRM).
4.2.2
Setting guidelines
The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration
made in PCM 600.
4.2.2.1
Example
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless
indicated otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be star connected and can be
connected with the star point to the object or from the object. This information must
be set to the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive
value of current, power etc means that the quantity has the direction into the object
and a negative value means direction out from the object. For directional functions
the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object
is defined as Reverse. See figure 20
52
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
Figure 20:
Example 1
Line
Ip
Transformer
Ip
Ip
Line
Reverse
Is
Transformer
protection
Forward
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Is
Line protection
Figure 21:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
53
Section 4
IED application
The figure 21 shows the most normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The
settings for CT direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line the
direction of the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward.
This means that the protection is looking towards the line.
Example 2
Transformer
Line
Reverse
Transformer
protection
Forward
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Line protection
Figure 22:
This example is similar to example 1 but the transformer is feeding just one line and
the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT
direction is set with different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same
current from the same CT that is feeding two IEDs. With these settings the directional
functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to look towards the line.
Example 3
54
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Transformer
Line
Forward
Definition of direction
for directional
line functions
Transformer and
Line protection
Reverse
Figure 23:
In this example one IED includes both transformer and line protection and the line
protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input
channels the CT direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means
that the direction Forward for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look
towards the line the direction of the directional functions of the line protection must
be set to Reverse. The direction Forward/Reverse is related to the reference object
that is the transformer in this case.
When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction it
shall be noted that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach
in forward and reverse direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria
that can differ. Normally it is not any limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind
and check if it is acceptable for the application in question.
If the IED has a sufficient number of analog current inputs an alternative solution is
shown in figure 24. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and
the line and transformer protection functions are configured to the different inputs.
The CT direction for the current channels to the line protection is set with the line as
reference object and the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to
Forward to protect the line.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
55
Section 4
IED application
Transformer
Line
Reverse
Transformer and
Line protection
Forward
Definition of direction
for directional
line functions
en05000462.vsd
Figure 24:
56
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Busbar
Busbar
Protection
1
en06000196.vsd
Figure 25:
For busbar protection it is possible to set the CTStarPoint parameters in two ways.
The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT
inputs marked with 1 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=ToObject, and for all CT inputs
marked with 2 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=FromObject.
The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that
case for all CT inputs marked with 1 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=FromObject, and
for all CT inputs marked with 2 in figure 25, set CTStarPoint=ToObject.
Regardless which one of the above two options is selected busbar differential
protection will behave correctly.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
57
Section 4
IED application
The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters
CTsec and CTprim for each current channel. For a 1000/1 A CT the following setting
shall be used: CTprim=1000 (value in A) CTsec=1 (value in A).
IPri
P1
(H1)
ISec
S2 (X2)
S1 (X1)
S2 (X2)
x
P2
(H2)
a)
S1 (X1)
x
P1
(H1)
b)
c)
en06000641.vsd
Figure 26:
Where:
a)
is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a dot indicates
the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (i.e. positive) polarity
b) and c)
are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note that
for this two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!
It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices rated
secondary current of a CT has typically one of the following values:
1A
5A
However in some cases the following rated secondary currents are as well used:
2A
10A
58
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
use 1A rated CT input into IED 670 in order to connect CTs with
1A and 2A secondary rating
use 5A rated CT input into IED 670 in order to connect CTs with
5A and 10A secondary rating
Figure 27 gives an example how to connect the star connected three-phase CT set to
IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make
this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670.
L3
IED 670
IL3
L2
IL2
IL1
L1
3
1
IL1
CT 600/5
Star Connected
4
1
IL2
IL3
IR
#3Ph I Star
AI01 (I)
3
4
AI02 (I)
5
6
AI03 (I)
7
8
AI04 (I)
9
10
AI05 (I)
11
12
AI06 (I)
#IL1
#IL2
#IL3
#IR
#2
Protected Object
en06000642.vsd
Figure 27:
Star connected three-phase CT set with star point towards the protected object
Where:
1)
shows how to connect three individual phase currents from star connected three-phase CT
set to three CT inputs in IED 670.
2)
shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth inputs
in IED 670. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made the IED 670 will still calculate
this current internally by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
59
Section 4
IED application
3)
is TRM module where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these
current inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600A
CTsec=5A
CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set
in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents are already
measured towards the protected object).
4)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three current
inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 6). Depending on type
of functions which need this current information, more then one preprocessing block might
be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
5)
is a connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect the residual/neutral
current input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 6). Note that this
connection in SMT shall not be done if the residual/neutral current is not connected to IED
670. In that case the pre-processing block will calculate it by vectorial summation of the three
individual phase currents.
6)
Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.
Another alternative is to have the star point of the three-phase CT set as shown in
figure 28:
60
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L2
L1
L3
IED 670
IL3
IL2
IL1
6
3
IR
IL3
IL2
CT 800/1
Star Connected
IL1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
#3Ph I Star
AI01 (I)
#IL1
#IL2
#IL3
AI02 (I)
#IR
#2
AI03 (I)
AI04 (I)
AI05 (I)
AI06 (I)
Protected Object
en06000644.vsd
Figure 28:
Star connected three-phase CT set with star point from the protected
object
Please note that in this case everything is done in a similar way as in the above
described example, except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following
setting parameters shall be entered:
CTprim=800A
CTsec=1A
CTStarPoint=FromObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter
as set in this example will invert the measured currents (i.e. turn the currents by 180)
in order to insure that the within IED 670 the currents are measured towards the
protected object.
Figure 29 gives an example how to connect the delta connected three-phase CT set
to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make
this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
61
Section 4
IED application
L1
L2
L3
IED 670
IL3
IL2
IL1
5
2
3
1
CT 600/5
in Delta
DAB Connected
IL1-IL2
IL2-IL3
IL3-IL1
1
2
AI01 (I)
#IL1-IL2
3
4
AI02 (I)
#IL2-IL3
#IL3-IL1
5
6
#3Ph I Delta
AI03 (I)
#Not used
#2
7
8
AI04 (I)
9
10
AI05 (I)
11
12
AI06 (I)
Protected Object
en06000645.vsd
Figure 29:
shows how to connect three individual phase currents from delta connected three-phase CT
set to three CT inputs in IED 670.
2)
is TRM module where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these
current inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600/1.732=346A
CTsec=5A
CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set
in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents are already
measured towards the protected object).
Table continued on next page
62
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three current
inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 6). Depending on type
of functions which need this current information, more then one preprocessing block might
be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
4)
shows that the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block shall not be connected
in SMT.
5)
Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.
Another alternative is ti have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 30:
L2
L1
L3
IED 670
IL3
IL2
IL1
5
2
3
CT 800/1
in Delta
DCA Connected
IL1-IL3
IL2-IL1
IL3-IL2
1
2
AI01 (I)
3
4
5
6
AI02 (I)
AI03 (I)
#3Ph I Delta
#IL1-IL2
#IL2-IL3
#IL3-IL1
#Not used
#2
7
8
AI04 (I)
4
9
10
AI05 (I)
11
12
AI06 (I)
Protected Object
en06000646.vsd
Figure 30:
Please note that in this case everything is done in a similar way as in the above
described example, except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following
setting parameters shall be entered:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
63
Section 4
IED application
CTprim=800/1.732=462A
CTsec=1A
CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter
as set in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents
are already measured towards the protected object).
L1
L2
L3
AI01 (I)
3
4
AI02 (I)
5
6
AI03 (I)
CT 1000/1
1
INP
AI04 (I)
#Not used
#Not used
9
10
#NP Current
AI05 (I)
#Not used
#INP
11
INP
12
#2
AI06 (I)
INP
en06000647.vsd
Figure 31:
64
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Where:
1)
2)
is TRM module where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these
current inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
For connection a) shown in figure 31:
CTprim=1000A
CTsec=1A
CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set
in this example will have no influence on the measured currents (i.e. currents are already
measured towards the protected object).
For connection b) shown in figure 31:
CTprim=1000A
CTsec=1A
CTStarPoint=ToObject
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of the first two parameters is used. The third parameter as set
in this example will invert the measured currents (i.e. turn the currents by 180o) in order to
insure that the within IED 670 the currents are measured towards the protected object.
3)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool.
4)
shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this CT input to
the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5)
Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.
As the IED uses primary system quantities the main VT ratios must be known. This
is done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage channel.
The phase-to-phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a phaseto-earth voltage from the VT.
Example
132kV 110V
3
3
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
(Equation 13)
65
Section 4
IED application
The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=110 (value
in V)
UPri
USec
a)
A
(H1)
a
(X1)
A
(H1)
da
(X1)
A
(H1)
a
(X1)
N
(H2)
n
(X2)
N
(H2)
dn
(X2)
B
(H2)
b
(X2)
b)
c)
d)
en06000591.vsd
Figure 32:
Where:
a)
is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a dot indicates
the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (i.e. positive) polarity
b)
is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-earth
connected VT
c)
is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta
connected VT
d)
is equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-phase
connected VT
It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices rated
secondary voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values:
100 V
110 V
115 V
120 V
IED 670 fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the
following examples.
Figure 33 gives an example how to connect the three phase-to ground connected VTs
to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make
this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670.
66
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L1
IED 670
L2
L3
66kV
3
66kV
3
2
3
1
110V
3
13
14
AI07 (I)
#3Ph-E VTs
15
16
17
AI08 (U)
18
AI09 (U)
#UL2
19
20
110V
3
#UL3
#Not used
AI10 (U)
#1
21
22
AI11 (U)
23
24
66kV
3
#UL1
AI12 (U)
110V
3
en06000599.vsd
Figure 33:
shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-earth voltages to three VT inputs in IED 670
2)
is TRM module where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these
three voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=66 kV
VTsec= 110 V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.
66
110
66
=
3
110
3
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
67
Section 4
IED application
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three voltage
inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on type
of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block might be
connected in parallel to these three VT inputs
4)
shows that in this example the fourth (i.e. residual) input channel of the preprocessing block
is not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate 3Uo
inside by vectorial sum from the three phase to ground voltages connected to the first three
input channels of the same preprocessing block. Alternatively the fourth input channel can be
connected to open delta VT input, as shown in figure 35.
5)
Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool.
For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
However the following settings shall be set as shown here:
VBase=66 kV (i.e. rated Ph-Ph voltage)
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.
Figure 34 gives an example how to connect the two phase-to-phase connected VTs
to IED 670. It as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make
this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670. It shall be noted that this VT connection is only used on lower voltage levels
(i.e. rated primary voltage below 40 kV).
68
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L1
L2
L3
13.8kV
120V
13.8kV
IED 670
120V
5
3
13
14
AI07 (I)
15
16
#3Ph-Ph VTs
AI08 (U)
#UL1L2
#UL2L3
17
18
AI09 (U)
20
#1
AI10 (U)
21
22
#UL3L1
#Not Used
19
AI11 (U)
23
24
AI12 (U)
en06000600.vsd
Figure 34:
shows how to connect secondary side of two phase-to-phase VTs to three VT inputs in IED
670
2)
is TRM module where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these
three voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=13.8 kV
VTsec=120 V
Please note that inside IED 670 only ratio of these two parameters is used.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
69
Section 4
IED application
3)
are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect these three
voltage inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending
on type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block
might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs
4)
shows that in this example the fourth (i.e. residual) input channel of the preprocessing block
is not connected in SMT tool
5)
Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
However the following settings shall be set as shown here:
ConnectionType=Ph-Ph
VBase=13.8 kV
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.
Example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for high
impedance earthedgrounded or unearthedungrounded
Figure 35 gives an example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for high
impedance grounded or ungrounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type
of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3Uo3Vo to the IED.
In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of
3Uo3Vo will be equal to:
3Uo =
3 U Ph - Ph = 3 U Ph - E
(Equation 15)
The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E. Therefore, three series
connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal to three
times the individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of
such open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage equal to one third of
the rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage (i.e. 110/3V in this particular
example). Figure 35 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order
to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670.
70
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L1
IED 670
L2
L3
6.6kV
3
2
13
14
110V
3
AI07 (I)
15
16
AI08 (U)
17
18
6.6kV
3
110V
3
AI09 (U)
19
20
AI10 (U)
22
#Not Used
#Not Used
21
+3Uo
#3Uo Voltage
AI11 (U)
#Not Used
#3Uo
23
24
#1
AI12 (U)
6.6kV
3
110V
3
en06000601.vsd
Figure 35:
shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in IED 670.
Please note that +3Uo shall be connected to the IED!
2)
is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input
the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
VT sec = 3
3 6.6 = 11.43kV
110
3
= 110V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.
3 6.6
110
6.6
=
3
110
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
71
Section 4
IED application
3)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool.
4)
shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage input
to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5)
Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall
be set accordingly.
Example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for low
impedance earthedgrounded or solidly earthedgrounded power
systems
Figure 36 gives an example how to connect the open delta VT to IED 670 for low
impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems. It shall be noted that this
type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3Uo to the IED.
In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Uo will
be equal to:
3Uo =
U Ph - Ph
3
= U Ph - E
(Equation 19)
The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E Therefore, three series
connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to one
individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such open
delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage close to rated phase-to-phase VT
secondary voltage (i.e. 115V or (115/1.732)V as in this particular example). Figure
36 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670.
72
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
L1
IED 670
L2
L3
138 kV
3
138kV
3
2
13
14
115V
3
AI07 (I)
15
16
17
18
115V
3
19
20
AI08 (U)
AI09 (U)
#3Uo Voltage
#Not used
AI10 (U)
#Not used
21
+3Uo
22
#Not used
AI11 (U)
#3Uo
23
24
#1
AI12 (U)
138 kV
3
115V
3
en06000602.vsd
Figure 36:
shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in IED 670.
Please note that +3Uo shall be connected to the IED!
2)
is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage
input the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
VT sec =
138
3
115
3
= 138kV
= 115V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the
ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.
138
115
138
=
3
115
3
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
73
Section 4
IED application
3)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool.
4)
shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage
input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5)
preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the
configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to
the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only
for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters
DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Figure 37 gives an example how to connect the neutral point VT to IED 670. It shall
be noted that this type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional
toUo to the IED.
In case of a solid ground fault in high impedance grounded or ungrounded systems
the primary value of Uo voltage will be equal to:
Uo =
Vo =
U Ph - Ph
3
VPh - Ph
3
= U Ph - E
= VPh - Gnd
(Equation 23)
Figure 37 as well gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within IED
670.
74
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
IED 670
Protected Object
2
13
14
L1
L2
L3
AI07 (I)
15
16
AI08 (I)
17
18
19
20
AI09 (I)
3
AI10 (U)
#Not used
#Not used
21
22
#NP Voltage
AI11 (U)
#Not used
#UNP
23
Uo
24
#1
AI12 (U)
6.6 kV
3
Figure 37:
100V
en06000603.vsd
shows how to connect the secondary side of neutral point VT to one VT input in IED 670.
Please note that +Uo shall be connected to the IED!
2)
is TRM module where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input
the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =
6.6
3
= 3.81kV
VT sec = 100V
Inside IED 670 only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of the neutral point VT.
Table continued on next page
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
75
Section 4
IED application
3)
shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool.
4)
shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (i.e. SMT) which connect this voltage input
to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 5).
5)
preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:
These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
IED 670, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool.
For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.
4.2.3
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration
made in PCM 600.
Table 1:
Parameter
PhaseAngleRef
Table 2:
Parameter
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
Description
Ch
Reference channel
for phase angle
presentation
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
76
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
CTprim2
Range
1 - 99999
Step
1
3000
Description
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec7
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec8
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
77
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTStarPoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec9
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint10
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec10
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim10
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint11
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec11
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim11
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint12
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards
protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec12
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim12
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary
current
4.3
4.3.1
78
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Connection of each bay with respect to the two differential protection zones and
the check zone. The user can freely set in PST the individual bay names in order
to make easy identification of each primary bay for station personnel
Status of each individual primary switchgear device (i.e. open, closed, 00 as
intermediate and 11 as bad state). The user can freely set in PCM 600 the
individual primary switchgear object names in order to make easy identification
of each switchgear device for station personnel
The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects.
The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole front
plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality:
Figure 38:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
79
Section 4
IED application
Figure 39:
80
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Figure 40:
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with:
4.3.2.2
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
81
Section 4
IED application
Table 3:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Language
English
OptionalLanguage
English
DisplayTimeout
10 - 120
10
60
Min
AutoRepeat
Off
On
On
ContrastLevel
-10 - 20
DefaultScreen
0-0
Default screen
EvListSrtOrder
Latest on top
Oldest on top
Latest on top
SymbolFont
IEC
ANSI
IEC
4.3.3
Indication LEDs
4.3.3.1
Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about
the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are
configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected
individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for
trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow.
Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to
Technical reference manual.
4.3.3.2
Setting parameters
Table 4:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
tRestart
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Defines the
disturbance length
tMax
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
82
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SeqTypeLED1
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED2
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED3
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED4
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED5
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED6
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED7
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED8
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED9
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
83
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SeqTypeLED10
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED11
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED12
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED13
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED14
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
SeqTypeLED15
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
Application
The protection and control IEDs have a complex design with many included
functions. The included self-supervision function and the INTernal signals function
block provide good supervision of the IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze
and locate a fault.
Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate
possible faults through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or
through the software communication.
84
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory
functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure,
a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a
corresponding event is generated.
Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated
when the status changes for the:
The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The
list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it
is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list cannot be cleared and its content cannot
be modified.
The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during
commissioning and fault tracing.
The information can only be retrieved with the aid of a Station Monitoring System
(SMS). The PC can be connected either to the port at the front or at the rear of the
IED.
4.4.1.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.4.2
Time synchronization
4.4.2.1
Application
Use time synchronization to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection
and control system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between
all IEDs in the system possible.
Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when
evaluating faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within the IED can
be compared to one another. With time synchronization, events and disturbances
within the entire station, and even between line ends, can be compared at evaluation.
In the IED 670 IED, the internal time can be synchronized from a number of sources:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
85
Section 4
IED application
Out of these, LON and SPA contains two types of synchronization messages:
Coarse time messages are sent every minute and contain complete date and time,
i.e. year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.
Fine time messages are sent every second and comprises only seconds and
milliseconds.
The setting tells the IED which of these that shall be used to synchronize the IED.
It is possible to set several time-sources, i.e. for instance both SNTP and GPS, and
in that case the IED will automatically choose the time-source that will provide the
best accuracy. At a given point in time, only one time-source will be used.
4.4.2.2
Setting guidelines
System time
The time is set with years, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.
Synchronization
The setting parameters for the real-time clock with external time synchronization
(TIME) are set via the local HMI or the PCM 600 tool.
TimeSynch
When the source of time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the parameter
is called TimeSynch. The time synchronization source can also be set from the PCM
600 tool. The setting alternatives are:
FineSyncSource which can have the following values:
Off
SPA
LON
BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
86
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Off
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
4.4.2.3
Setting parameters
Path in local HMI: Setting/Time
Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization
Table 5:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Off
SPA
LON
SNTP
Off
Coarse time
synchronization
source
FineSyncSource
Off
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
Off
Fine time
synchronization
source
SyncMaster
Off
SNTP-Server
Off
Activate IEDas
synchronization
master
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
Fast
Fast
Table 6:
Parameter
REB 670
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ModulePosition
3 - 16
Hardware position of
IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput
1 - 16
BinDetection
PositiveEdge
NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Positive or negative
edge detection
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
87
Section 4
IED application
Table 7:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ServerIP-Add
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Table 8:
Parameter
88
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
March
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
0 - 86400
3600
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 9:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
October
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
0 - 86400
3600
Table 10:
Parameter
NoHalfHourUTC
Table 11:
Parameter
REB 670
Step
1
Default
0
Unit
-
Description
Number of half-hours
from UTC
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SynchType
BNC
Opto
Opto
Type of
synchronization
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
89
Section 4
IED application
4.4.3
4.4.3.1
Application
Six sets of settings are available to optimize IED operation for different system
conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the
human-machine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable
IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.
Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable
protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity
requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially,
if the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the
conditions in the power system.
Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary
equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pretested settings in advance for different protection functions. Six different groups of
setting parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the
different programmable binary inputs by means of external or internal control signals.
A function block, SGC, (available in CAP 531) defines how many setting groups are
used. Setting is done with parameter MAXSETGR and shall be set to the required
value for each application. Only the number of setting groups set will be available in
PST for activation with the ACGR function block.
4.4.3.2
Setting guidelines
The setting ActiveSetGrp, which is set via from the local HMI or from the PCM600
tool, is used to select which parameter group to be active. The active group can also
be selected with configured input to the function block SGC.
The length of the pulse, sent out by the output signal SETCHGD when an active group
has changed, is set with the parameter t.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.
4.4.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 12:
Parameter
t
90
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Unit
s
Description
Pulse length of pulse
when setting changed
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 13:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ActiveSetGrp
SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
SettingGroup1
ActiveSettingGroup
NoOfSetGrp
1-6
No
Number of possible
setting groups to
switch between
4.4.4
4.4.4.1
Application
The protection and control IEDs have a complex configuration with many included
functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature to
individually block a single, several or all functions.
This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables
the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct
functionality and to check parts of the configuration etc.
4.4.4.2
Setting guidelines
Remember always that there are two possible ways to place the IED in the Test
mode: On state. If, at the end of one test, you took off the IED from the Test mode,
but the functions are still shown being in the test mode, check your configuration
you might have the input on the TEST function block activated.
4.4.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 14:
Parameter
REB 670
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TestMode
Off
On
Off
Test mode in
operation (On) or not
(Off)
EventDisable
Off
On
Off
CmdTestBit
Off
On
Off
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
91
Section 4
IED application
4.4.5
IED identifiers
4.4.5.1
Application
The IED identifier function is divided into two parts. One part handles factory defined
settings and the other part handles customer specific settings.
The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the
local HMI under:
Diagnostics/IED status/Product Identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
IEDType
ProductDef
IEDMainFunType
FirmwareVer
Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
The customer specific settings are used to give the IED an unique name and address.
The settings are used by a central control system, for instance micro scada, to
communicate with the IED. The customer specific identifiers are found in the local
HMI under:
Settings/General settings/Power system/Identifiers
The settings can also be made from the PCM600 tool. For more information about
the available identifiers, refer to section "Setting parameters".
92
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.4.5.2
Setting parameters
Table 15:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
StationName
0 - 18
Station name
Station name
StationNumber
0 - 99999
Station number
ObjectName
0 - 18
Object name
Object name
ObjectNumber
0 - 99999
Object number
UnitName
0 - 18
Unit name
Unit name
UnitNumber
0 - 99999
Unit number
4.4.6
4.4.6.1
Application
The rated system frequency is set under General settings/Power system/Primary
Values in PCM 600 parameter setting tree.
4.4.6.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the instantaneous non-directional phase overcurrent protection
functions are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM
600).
Set the system rated frequency. Refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs
(SMAI)" for description on frequency tracking.
4.4.6.3
Setting parameters
Table 16:
Parameter
Frequency
Step
Default
Unit
10.0
60.0
Hz
4.4.7
4.4.7.1
Application
Description
Rated system
frequency
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal
Matrix Tool (see the overview of the engineering process in chapter "Engineering of
the IED"). It represents the way binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670
configuration.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
93
Section 4
IED application
4.4.7.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMBI available to the user in PST. However,
the user must give a name to the SMBI instance and the SMBI inputs, directly in the
CAP tool. These names will define the function block in the Signal Matrix Tool.
4.4.7.3
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.4.8
4.4.8.1
Application
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool (see the overview of the engineering process in chapter
"Engineering of the IED"). It represents the way binary outputs are sent from one IED
670 configuration.
4.4.8.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMBO available to the user in PST. However,
the user must give a name to the SMBO instance and the SMBO outputs, directly in
the CAP tool. These names will define the function block in the Signal Matrix Tool.
4.4.8.3
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.4.9
4.4.9.1
Application
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool (please see the overview of the engineering process in chapter
"Engineering of the IED"). It represents the way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought
in for one IED 670 configuration.
4.4.9.2
Setting guidelines
There are no setting parameters for the SMMI available to the user in PST. However,
the user must give a name to the SMMI instance and the SMMI inputs, directly in the
CAP tool.
94
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.4.9.3
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.4.10
4.4.10.1
Application
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block PreProc, as it is also
named) is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (see
the overview of the engineering process in chapter "Engineering of the IED"). It
represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
4.4.10.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) functions are set via
the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM 600).
Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one
neutral value), either voltage or current. The outputs of the SMAI are giving
information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS
value, frequency and frequency derivates, etc. 244 values in total). Besides the block
group name, the analog inputs type (voltage or current) and the analog input names
that can be set directly in CAP, the user has several settings available in PST:
DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid for function block PR01, PR13, PR25 only.
Reference DFT block for external output (SPFCOUT function output).
DFTReference: Reference DFT block for that specific instance of the SMAI.
These DFT reference block settings decide which DFT block will be used as reference
in the calculation of frequency and other values (Internal DFTRef will use set system
frequency. GrpnAdDFTRef will use calculated frequency from the selected group
block, ExternalDFTRef will use input DFTSPFC as frequency reference.)
ConnectionType: Connection type for that specific instance (n) of the SMAI (if it is
Ph-N or Ph-Ph). Depending on connection type setting the not connected Ph-N or
Ph-Ph outputs will be calculated.
Negation: If the user wants to negate the 3ph signal, it is possible to choose to negate
only the phase signals Negate3Ph, only the neutral signal NegateN or both Negate3Ph
+N; negation means rotation with 180 of the vectors.
UBase: Base voltage setting (for each instance n).
MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of UBase (for each instance n).
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
95
Section 4
IED application
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh4
Figure 41:
The examples shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application.
Example 1
96
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
PR13SMAI
PR01SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
PR25SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
07000198.vsd
Figure 42:
Assume instance PR07 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration to
control the frequency tracking. Observe that the selected reference instance must be
a voltage type.
For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 41 for numbering):
PR01: DFTRefExtOut = AdDFTRefCh7 to route PR07 reference to the SPFCOUT
output, DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh7 for PR01 to use PR07 as reference (see
Figure 42) PR02 PR12: DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh7 for PR02 PR12 to use
PR07 as reference.
For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:
PR13 PR24: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference
(PR07)
For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:
PR25 PR36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference
(PR07)
Example 2
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
97
Section 4
IED application
PR01SMAI
PR13SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
PR25SMAI
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI4NAME
TYPE
SYNCOUT
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
NOSMPLCY
07000199.vsd
Figure 43:
Assume instance PR16 in task time group 2 has been selected in the configuration to
control the frequency tracking for all instances. Observe that the selected reference
instance must be a voltage type
For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 41 for numbering):
PR01 PR12: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference
(PR16)
For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:
PR13: DFTRefExtOut = AdDFTRefCh4 to route PR16 reference to the SPFCOUT
output, DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh4 for PR13 to use PR16 as reference (see
Figure 43) PR14 PR24: DFTReference = AdDFTRefCh4 to use DFTSPFC input as
reference (PR16)
For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:
PR25 PR36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference
(PR16)
4.4.10.3
Setting parameters
98
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 17:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
TYPE
1-2
Ch
1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 18:
Parameter
REB 670
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Negation
Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Off
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base Voltage
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
99
Section 4
IED application
Table 19:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
TYPE
1-2
Ch
1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 20:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Negation
Off
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Off
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base Voltage
4.4.11
4.4.11.1
Application
The analog summation block SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum
of two sets of 3 ph analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that
might need it.
4.4.11.2
Setting guidelines
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks. The summation
block has several settings.
SummationType: Summation type (Group 1+ Group2, Group 1 Group 2, Group 2Group 1 or (Group1 + Group 2)).
DFTReference: The reference DFT block (InternalDFT Ref, Grp1AdDFTRef or
External DFT ref) as above.
100
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
FreqMeasMinVal: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of UBase (for each instance n).
UBase: Base voltage setting (for each instance n).
4.4.11.3
Setting parameters
Table 21:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SummationType
Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
(Group1+Group2)
Group1+Group2
Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
Table 22:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FreqMeasMinVal
5 - 200
10
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
4.4.12
4.4.12.1
Application
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication
function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
The two outputs of the AUTS function block can be used in the configuration for
different indication and alarming reasons, or can be sent to the station control for the
same purpose.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
101
Section 4
IED application
4.4.12.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.4.13
4.4.13.1
Setting parameters
Table 23:
Parameter
Operation
Range
Off
On
Step
-
Default
Unit
Off
4.5
Differential protection
4.5.1
Description
Operation Off/On
3Id/I
Id/I
102
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SWSGGIO
4.5.1.1
Basic applications
General
Basic types of applications for REB 670 IED are shown and described in this chapter.
For these applications usually three phase version of the IED, with two differential
zone and four (or even eight) 3-phase CT inputs, is used.
The REB 670 general differential function is suitable for application on mesh-corner
arrangements. Mesh corners might have four or even up to six CT inputs and are
basically simple single busbar arrangements. A similar application will occur when
a T-protection is required for one-and-half breaker or ring busbar arrangements.
xx06000009.vsd
Figure 44:
4.5.1.2
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
103
Section 4
IED application
point of view as simultaneous faults on all power system elements connected to the
bus. On the other hand, the relay has to be dependable as well. Failure to operate or
even slow operation of the differential relay, in case of an actual internal fault, can
have serious consequences. Human injuries, power system blackout, transient
instability or considerable damage to the surrounding substation equipment and the
close-by generators are some of the possible outcomes.
Therefore the busbar protection must fulfill the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Must be absolutely stable during all external faults. External faults are much
more common than internal faults. The magnitude of external faults can be equal
to the stations maximum short circuit capacity. Heavy CT-saturation due to high
DC components and/or remanence at external faults must not lead to
maloperation of the busbar differential protection. The security against
misoperation must be extremely high due to the heavy impact on the overall
network service.
Must have as short tripping time as possible in order to minimize the damage,
minimize the danger and possible injury to the people who might be working in
the station at the moment of internal fault, and secure the network stability.
Must be able to detect and securely operate for internal faults even with heavy
CT saturation. The protection must also be sensitive enough to operate for
minimum fault currents, which sometimes can be lower than the maximum load
currents.
Must be able to selectively detect faults and trip only the faulty part of the busbar
system.
Must be secure against maloperation due to auxiliary contact failure, possible
human mistakes and faults in the secondary circuits etc.
Differential protection
The basic concept for any differential relay is that the sum of all currents, which flow
to and from the protection zone, must be equal to zero. If this is not the case, an internal
fault has occurred. This is practically a direct use of well known Kirchhoffss first law.
However, busbar differential relays do not measure directly the primary currents in
the high voltage conductors, but the secondary currents of magnetic core current
transformers (i.e. CTs), which are installed in all high-voltage bays connected to the
busbar.
Therefore, the busbar differential relay is unique in this respect, that usually quite a
few CTs, often with very different ratios and classes, are connected to the same
differential protection zone. Because the magnetic core current transformers are nonlinear measuring devices, under high current conditions in the primary CT circuits
the individual secondary CT currents can be drastically different from the original
primary currents. This is caused by CT saturation, a phenomenon that is well known
104
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
to protection engineers. During the time when any of the current transformer
connected to the differential relay is saturated, the sum of all CT secondary currents
will not be equal to zero and relay will measure false differential current. This
phenomenon is especially predominant for busbar differential protection applications,
because it has the strong tendency to cause unwanted operation of the differential
relay.
Remanence in the magnetic core of a current transformer is an additional factor, which
can influence the secondary CT current. It can improve or reduce the capability of
the current transformer to properly transfer the primary current to the secondary side.
However, the CT remanence is a random parameter and it is not possible in practice
to precisely predict it.
Another, and maybe less known, transient phenomenon appears in the CT secondary
circuit at the instant when a high primary current is interrupted. It is particularly
dominant if the HV circuit breaker chops the primary current before its natural zero
crossing. This phenomenon is manifested as an exponentially decaying dc current
component in the CT secondary circuit. This secondary dc current has no
corresponding primary current in the power system. The phenomenon can be simply
explained as a discharge of the magnetic energy stored in the magnetic core of the
current transformer during the high primary current condition. Depending on the type
and design of the current transformer this discharging current can have a time constant
in the order of a hundred milliseconds.
Consequently, all these phenomena have to be considered during the design stage of
a busbar differential relay in order to prevent the unwanted operation of the relay
during external fault conditions.
The analogue generation of the busbar differential relays (i.e.RADHA, RADSS, REB
103) generally solves all these problems caused by the CT non-linear characteristics
by using the galvanic connection between the secondary circuits of all CTs connected
to the protected zone. These relays are designed in such a way that the current
distribution through the relay differential branch during all transient conditions
caused by non-linearity of the CTs will not cause the unwanted operation of the
differential relay. In order to obtain the required secondary CT current distribution,
the resistive burden in the individual CT secondary circuits must be kept below the
pre-calculated value in order to guaranty the stability of the relay.
In new numerical protection relays, all CT and VT inputs are galvanically separated
from each other. All analog input quantities are sampled with a constant sampling
rate and these discreet values are then transferred to corresponding numerical values
(i.e. AD conversion). After these conversions, only the numbers are used in the
protection algorithms. Therefore, for the modern numerical differential relays the
secondary CT circuit resistance might not be a decisive factor any more.
The important factor for the numerical differential relay is the time available to the
relay to make the measurements before the CT saturation, which will enable the relay
to take the necessary corrective actions. This practically means that the relay has to
be able to make the measurement and the decision during the short period of time,
within each power system cycle, when the CTs are not saturated. From the practical
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
105
Section 4
IED application
experience, obtained from heavy current testing, this time, even under extremely
heavy CT saturation, is for practical CTs around two milliseconds. Because of this,
it was decided to take this time as the design criterion in REB 670 IED, for the
minimum acceptable time before saturation of a practical magnetic core CT. Thus,
the CT requirements for REB 670 IED are kept to an absolute minimum. Refer to
section "Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements" for more details.
However, if the necessary preventive action has to be taken for every single CT input
connected to the differential relay, the relay algorithm would be quite complex. Thus,
it was decided to re-use the ABB excellent experience from the analog percentage
restrained differential protection relay (i.e. RADSS and REB 103), and use only the
following three quantities:
1.
2.
3.
incoming current (i.e. sum of all currents which are entering the protection zone)
outgoing current (i.e. sum of all currents which are leaving the protection zone)
differential current (i.e. sum of all currents connected to the protection zone)
The so-called CT switching (i.e. zone selection) is required in situation when one
particular circuit (i.e. bay) can be connected to different busbars by individual
disconnectors. Typical example is a station with double busbars with or without
transfer bus as shown in figure "" and figure "", where any feeder bay can be
connected to any of the two buses. In such cases the status of all busbar disconnectors
and all transfer disconnectors shall be given to the BBP.
Traditionally the CT switching has been done in CT secondary circuits. However
with REB 670 this is not the case. All necessary zone selection (i.e. CT switching) is
done in software. Therefore the CT secondary circuits are always intact and without
any auxiliary relay contacts.
In order to provide proper zone selection (i.e. busbar replica) the position information
from all relevant primary switches (i.e. disconnectors and/or circuit breakers) must
be given to the REB 670. This is typically done by connecting two auxiliary contacts
106
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
(i.e. normaly open and normaly closed aux contacts) from each primary switch to the
REB 670 binary inputs (i.e. optocouplers). In REB 670 configuration one
SwitchStatus function block shall be associated with each primary switching device.
This block is then used internally to derive the primary object status and then pass
this information to the BBP internal Zone Selection logic.
The second auxiliary contact indicates that primary device is open. In protection
literature it is called by different names as stated below:
Typically both contacts are used to provide position indication and supervision for
busbar protection.
The minimum requirement for the busbar replica is the record of the disconnector
position by using just one auxiliary contact, either NO or NC type. However recording
a pair of auxiliary contacts, representing the OPEN and CLOSE position, offer
additional features which can improve the reliability of the bus replica including
supervision possibilities.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
107
Section 4
IED application
Scheme2_INX "Closed or open if clear indication available otherwise last
position saved"
As the name of the scheme suggests, only when the auxiliary contacts signal clean
OPEN or clean CLOSED position disconnector is considered to be open respectively
closed. However this poses the stringent requirements on the auxiliary contacts that
the CLOSED signal must become active a certain time (>150 ms) before current starts
flowing e.g. through arcing. Otherwise this current will not be taken into account in
the BBP and this can result in a maloperation. Therefore, good timing of two auxiliary
contacts is definitely required.
The time during which the OPEN and CLOSED signals disagree (i.e. both binary
inputs are active or both are inactive) is monitored by the isolator supervision function
for both of the above two schemes. The maximum time allowed before an alarm is
given can be set according to the disconnector timing.
Table 24 and the following two figures summarize the properties of these two
schemes.
Table 24:
Treatment of primary object auxiliary contact status within BBP in REB 670
Primary equipment
Normally
Normally
Open auxiliary Closed
contact status auxiliary
(i.e. closed contact status
or a contact) (i.e. open or
b contact)
108
Status in BBP
when
Scheme 1
RADSS
is selected
when
Scheme 2
INX
is selected
Alarm facility
Alarm after
settable time
delay
Information
visible on builtin front HMI
open
open
closed
Last position
saved
yes
intermediate
_00
open
closed
open
open
no
open
closed
open
closed
closed
no
closed
closed
closed
closed
closed
yes
badState_11
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
arcing possible
closed
open
BBP
N.O.
input closed
1
0
N.C.
input open
1
0
current
assignment
1
0
1)
1)
Figure 45:
Scheme_1 RADSS
2)
arcing possible
closed
open
BBP
N.O.
input closed
1
0
N.C.
input open
1
0
current
assignment
1
0
1)
1)
Figure 46:
Scheme2_INX
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
109
Section 4
IED application
Line disconnector replica
The line disconnector position from a feeder bay might be required for BBP under
certain circumstances. Typical example is when the line disconnector QB9 and
associated earthing switch are located between CT and protected busbar as indicated
in figure 47.
ZA
ZB
QB1
QB2
QA1
QC1
QB9
BI1
en06000086.vsd
Figure 47:
Such feeder set-up can be often found in GIS stations where cable CTs are used for
busbar protection. If in such feeder the line disconnector QB9 is open and then
immediately the earthing switch QC1 is closed before the busbar disconnectors
QB1 & QB2 are open there is a danger to get current unbalance into the zone
differential measurement under following circumstances:
In case of parallel lines zero sequence mutual coupling can induce zero sequence
current into the grounded line especially during external earth-faults.
In case of cable feeder the stored energy in the cable will be discharged through
the earthing switch at the moment of its closing.
In order to avoid such problems for BBP the status of line disconnector can be
monitored by BBP and CT measurement can be disconnected from both differential
zones as soon line disconnector is open. Similar functionality can be obtained by
instead monitoring the position of feeder breaker QA1. In such case the breaker
closing signal shall be connected to BBP as well.
The REB 670 IED offers an extremely effective solution for stations where zone
selection (i.e. CT switching) is required. This is possible due to the software facility,
which gives full and easy control over all CT inputs connected to the IED. The
philosophy is to allow every CT input to be individually controlled by a setting
parameter. This parameter called ZoneSel can be individually configured for every
CT input, which is available within REB 670 IED. This parameter, for every bay, can
be set to only one of the following five alternatives:
110
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FIXEDtoZA
FIXEDtoZB
FIXEDtoZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZA, then this
CT input will be only included to the differential zone A. This setting is typically
used for simple single zone application such as: single busbar staions, one-and-a-half
breaker stations or double breaker stations.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZB, then this
CT input will be only included to the differential zone B. This setting is typically used
for applications such as: one-and-a-half breaker stations or double breaker stations.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZA&-ZB, then
this CT input will be included to the differential zone A, but its inverted current value
will be as well included to the differential zone B. This setting is typically used for
bus coupler or bus section bays when only one current transformer is available see
figure 49.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to Ctrl_Includes, then this
CT input will be:
This setting is typically used for feeder bays in double busbar stations in order to form
proper busbar disconnector replica. It is especially suitable when normally open and
normally closed (i.e. a and b) auxiliary contacts from the busbar disconnectors are
available to the IED 670.
If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to Ctrl_Excludes, then
this CT input will be:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
111
Section 4
IED application
In practice there are three different solutions for bus section or bus coupler bay layout.
First solution is with two sets of main CTs, which are located on both sides of the
circuit breaker, see figure 48.
ZA
ZB
BS
8
en01000013.vsd
Figure 48:
Example of station with two sets of main CTs in the bus-section bay
This is the most expensive, but good solution for busbar protection. Two differential
zones overlapping across the bus-section or bus-coupler circuit breaker. All faults in
the overlapping zone will be instantly tripped by both zones irrespective of the section/
coupler circuit breaker status. However with modern busbar protection such as REB
670 it is possible to disconnect both CTs from the relevant zones when the bus-section
or bus-coupler circuit breaker is open. This will insure that if internal fault happen,
in the overlapping zone, while breaker is open, only the faulty zone will be tripped
while other busbar section will remain in service. However, due to low probability
of such fault happening, while the breaker is open, such special considerations are
typically not included in the busbar protection scheme for this type of stations. In
such application the bus section or bus coupler current transformers shall be wired
112
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
just to two separate current input of the REB 670 IED. Then in the parameter setting
tool (i.e. PST) for the corresponding bays the parameter ZoneSel shall be set to
FIXEDtoZA in one bay and FIXEDtoZB in another bay. This will insure that these
currents are given to both differential zones.
When live tank circuit breakers are used, owing to the high cost of the HV current
transformer often only one current transformer is available in bus-section or buscoupler bay. The suggested solution in such applications is shown in figure 49.
ZA
ZB
BS
Blind Zone
8
en01000014.vsd
Figure 49:
For this type of solution just one main CT is located on only one side of the circuit
breaker. Thus, there is no zone overlapping across the section/coupler circuit breaker
as shown in figure 48. A blind spot exists between the current transformer and the
circuit breaker in the bus section or bus-coupler bay as shown in figure 49.
For an internal fault in the blind spot, the differential zone ZA will unnecessarily
operate and open the bus section breaker and all other feeder breakers associated with
it. Nevertheless the fault will still exists on other busbar section, but it is outside the
current transformer in the bus section bay and hence outside the zone ZB (i.e. it is
external fault for zone ZB). Similar problem will also exist if section/coupler circuit
breaker was open before the internal fault in the blind zone. Therefore, the busbar
protection scheme does not protect the complete busbar.
In order to improve the busbar protection scheme with this type of station layout, it
is often required to disconnect the bus-section or bus-coupler CT from the two
differential zones as soon as the bus-section or bus-coupler circuit breaker is opened.
This arrangement can be easily achieved within REB 670. In such application the bus
section or bus coupler current transformer shall be wired just to one current input of
the REB 670 IED. Then in the parameter setting tool (i.e. PST) for the corresponding
bay parameter ZoneSel shall be set to FIXEDtoZA&-ZB. This will insure that this
current is given to both differential zones. In order to disconnect this current from
both zones, when the coupler/section breaker is open additional logic as shown in
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
113
Section 4
IED application
figure 50 have to be done in REB 670 configuration. The following two binary inputs
are at least necessary in order to guaranty proper operation of such logic:
Normally closed contact of the bus section or bus coupler circuit breaker
Signal from the bus section or bus coupler circuit breaker closing circuit that
somebody wants to close the breaker
This solution does not depend on contact timing between the main contacts and
auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker. It directly follows the philosophy used for
RADSS/REB 103 schemes used for similar applications before. Principle connection
between the bus-coupler CB normally closed auxiliary contact (b-contact), REB 670
and internal configuration logic, see figure 50
Zone A
Zone B
REB 670
QB1
QB2
b
t=1s
t
QA1
&
BI1
2400/1
CB Closing
Signal
Bxxx
BLKTR
CTRLZA
BIM
External or Internal
Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command
Bus-Coupler
Bay
CTRLZB
CT Input
TRM
A/D
CONNZB
ZEROCUR
TRZONE
TRBAY
I3PB1
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip
TRIP
CONNZA
BOM
Other
Equipment
BBP & BFP trip command to Bus-Coupler breaker
en06000155.vsd
Figure 50:
Bus coupler bay with one CT and b aux. contact only from CB.
This scheme will disconnect the section/coupler CTs after about 80 ms (pre-set time
under parameter setting tZeroCurrent in the relevant bay function block) from the
moment of opening of the section/coupler CB (i.e. from the moment when auxiliary
b contact makes). Nevertheless this time delay is absolutely necessary in order to
prevent racing between the opening of the main breaker contact and disconnection of
the CT from the differential zones. This scheme will as well disconnect the CT in
case of the operation of any of the two internal differential zones used in the scheme.
This will secure the delayed (about 150 ms) clearing and tripping of the internal fault
within the blind zone even in case of section/coupler circuit breaker failure during
114
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
such fault. This facility will improve the performance of the busbar protection scheme
when one CT is located on only one side of the bus-section / bus-coupler circuit
breaker.
With GIS or live tank circuit breakers, owing to high cost of HV CT installations,
sometimes no current transformers are available in bus-section or bus-coupler bay.
This is the third solution shown in figure 51
ZA
10
BS
ZB
10
en04000283.vsd
Figure 51:
In such case two separate zones can be maintained only while bus coupler breaker is
open. As soon as bus coupler breaker is going to be closed the zone interconnection
feature in REB 670 must be activated and complete busbars will be automatically
protected with just one overall differential zone.
Since there are no current transformer in the bus coupler bay, there is no need to
allocate internal bay function block for the bus coupler bay. However some additional
configuration logic is required to obtain automatic zone interconnection activation
when bus coupler breaker shall be closed. Example of such logic, see figure 52.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
115
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
QB1
BC CB
closing
switch
Zone B
QB2
REB 670
BOM
BIM
ZI
tOFF=1.0s
t
&
EXTSTART ACTIVE
ALARM
QA1
Indication that
Zone interconnection
is active
Bus coupler
en06000137.vsd
Figure 52:
When Live tank CBs or GIS are involved, there is a physical separation between the
CT and the CB. End Fault Protection is related to primary faults between main CT
and CB in a feeder bay. Therefore it is directly related to the position of the main CT
in feeder bay. Three CT positions in feeder bays are typically used in power systems
around the world, as shown in figure 53.
Busbar
Protection
BI1
Feeder
Protection
Busbar
Protection
Busbar
Protection
QA1
QA1
BI1
Feeder
Protection
BI1
Feeder
Protection
BI1
QA1
1
B
en06000138.vsd
Figure 53:
where:
A
= two CTs are available one on each side of the feeder circuit breaker
In figure 53/A where two CTs are available in a feeder bay the end fault protection
is not an issue. The busbar and feeder protection zones overlap across feeder circuit
116
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
breaker and all faults between these two CTs will be instantly detected and tripped
by both protection schemes. As a consequence of such fault both busbar and feeder
will be disconnected from the power system.
In figure 53/B where one CT is available on the line side of the feeder circuit breaker
the primary fault between CT and CB will cause certain problems. Typically such
fault will be detected and tripped by busbar protection. However to completely clear
such fault the remote feeder end CB must be tripped as well. It shall be noted that for
the feeder protection such fault will be either a reverse fault (i.e. distance protection
used for feeder protection) or external fault (i.e. line/transformer differential
protection used for feeder protection).
In figure 53/C where one CT is available on the bus side of the feeder circuit breaker
the primary fault between CT and CB will cause problem as well. Typically such fault
will be detected and tripped by feeder protection. However to completely clear such
fault the associated busbar section must be tripped as well. It shall be noted that the
busbar differential protection will classify such fault as external and without any
additional measures the busbar protection will remain stable.
In other to better understand end fault protection applications within busbar
protection, the figure 54 is used.
ZA
BI1
BI1
QA1
QA1
1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
4
3
xx06000139.vsd
Figure 54:
where:
1
In figure 54 single busbar station is shown. Two feeders on the left-hand side have
CTs on the line side of the breaker. The two feeders on the right-hand side of the
busbar have CTs on the busbar side of the breaker. It is assumed that busbar protection
is connected to all four set of CTs in this station.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
117
Section 4
IED application
Due to CT location in feeder bays, busbar protection will detect all primary faults
located within measuring boundary determined by CT locations, see figure 54.
However its operation will only completely clear faults within clearing boundary
determined by CB locations as shown in figure 54. Obviously, the primary faults inbetween these two boundaries do pose certain practical problems.
First of all it shall be noted that there is no ideal solution for faults within end zone
region in a feeder bay when the feeder breaker is closed. Such faults, within end fault
region, will be then cleared with additional time delay either by operation of local
backup protection (i.e. feeder circuit breaker failure protection) or by operation of
remote backup protection (i.e. remote ends zone 2 distance protection).
However, the overall busbar protection behavior can be improved for primary faults
within end fault regions, when feeder breaker is open. Under such circumstances the
following actions can be taken:
For feeders with CT on the line side of the circuit breaker (i.e. two feeders on
the left-hand side in figure 54), the current measurement can be disconnected
from the busbar protection zone some time after feeder CB opening (e.g. 400 ms
for transformer and cable feeders or longest autoreclosing dead time +300 ms
for overhead line feeders). At the same time, appropriately set and fast (i.e.
typically 40 ms time delayed) overcurrent protection shall be enabled to detect
fault within end fault region. Any operation of this overcurrent protection shall
only issue inter-trip command to the remote feeder end CB. Such overcurrent
protection is often called end fault protection in relay literature. It shall be noted
that at the same time busbar protection will remain stable (i.e. selective) for such
fault.
For feeders with CT on the bus side of the circuit breaker (i.e. two feeders on the
right-hand side in figure 54), the current measurement can be disconnected from
the busbar protection zone some time after feeder CB opening (i.e. after 400 ms).
This measure will insure fast busbar protection tripping for faults within end fault
region in that feeder bay, while feeder CB is open.
However, it shall be noted that in order to utilize end fault protection feeder circuit
breaker status and its closing command must be connected to the binary inputs of
busbar protection scheme in order to be available for Zone Selection logic. Please
refer to Zone Selection section for more info.
Within REB 670 above described, end fault protection logic can be easily done with
help of graphical configuration tool. One stage (i.e. 4th stage) from optionally
available overcurrent protection can be used as dedicated end fault protection for
feeders with CT on the line side of the CB.
End fault protection is here explained for simple single busbar station. However the
same principles are applicable to almost all other station layouts. However, under
certain circumstances, for stations with a transfer bus more extensive logic for end
fault protection implementation might be required.
118
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Zone interconnection (Load transfer)
In double busbar stations or double busbar with transfer bus stations it is common
requirement to use the possibility of zone interconnection of load current in any feeder
bay from one busbar to the other. The sequence of operation during zone
interconnection is normally as the following:
The zone interconnection has to be taken into consideration for the busbar differential
protection scheme, as the two busbar zones are interconnected together via two
disconnectors. The primary current split between the two busbars is not known and
the two separate measuring zones cannot be maintained.
In conventional, analog busbar protection systems the solutions have been to, by
extensive zone switching relays, disconnect one zone (normally zone B) and to
connect all feeders to other zone (normally zone A). At the same time the current
from the bus-coupler bay, which just circulates between two zones, must be
disconnected from the measuring differential zone.
Similar situation regarding busbar protection can occur between two single busbar
sections interconnected via sectionalizing disconnector, as shown in figure "". When
sectionalizer is closed then two separate protection zones becomes one and busbar
protection must be able to dynamically handle this.
Due to the numerical design the REB 670 IED can manage these situation in an elegant
and simple way. Internal feature called ZoneInterconnection will be used to handle
both situations. This feature can be activated either externally via binary input or
derived internally by built-in logic. Internally, this zone switching feature will be
activated if the following conditions are met:
This situation only means that for this particular bay both busbar disconnectors are
closed and therefore zone interconnection switching is happening in the station.
When zone switching feature is activated inside REB 670 IED, each individual bay
current will behave in the predetermined way as dictated by a parameter setting
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
119
Section 4
IED application
ZoneSwitching. This parameter, for every bay, can be set to only one of the following
three alternatives
Force out
Force in
Conditionally
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
setting then it can be insured that this sensitive level is blocked for external phase to
phase or three phase faults, which can cause CT saturation. Comparison between
these two characteristics is shown in figure 55.
Id [Primary Amps]
Sensitive
differential
protection
I in
I d=
Operate
region
Differential protection
operation characteristic
Diff Oper Level
Sensitive Oper Level
Figure 55:
Additionally the sensitive differential protection can be time delayed and it must be
externally enabled by a binary signal (i.e. from external open delta VT overvoltage
relay or power transformer neutral point overcurrent relay).
The setting parameters for the check zone are set via the local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
In REB 670 such check zone is included. By a parameter settings CheckZoneSel=
NotConnected/Connected can be decided, individually for every bay, if it shall be
connected to the check zone or not. This setting is available in bay function block.
Then for every zone there is a setting parameter CheckZoneSup which can be set to
On or Off. This setting parameter determines if the individual zone shall be supervised
or not by a check zone. This setting is available in both Zone functions. Finally the
check zone shall be enabled (i.e. setting parameter Operation shall be set to On) in
order to fully enable the check zone. Operating characteristics for the check zone can
be set independently from the two discriminating zones.
However it shall be observed that the check zone has slightly different operating
characteristic from the usual discriminating zones. For the check zone the resultant
outgoing current is used as stabilizing current instead of total incoming current in
order to guarantee the check zone operation for all possible operating conditions in
the station. The check zone operating characteristic is shown in figure 56:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
121
Id [Primary Amps]
Section 4
IED application
Operate
region
Oper Level
s=0.0-0.90 (settable)
Figure 56:
It shall be noted that the check zone minimum differential operational level
OperLevel shall be set equal to or less than the corresponding operating level of the
usual discriminating zones.
For substations where traditional CT switching is not required (i.e. single busbar
station or one-and-half breaker station) the check zone shall not be used. For such
applications the check zone shall be disabled by setting check zone setting parameter
Operation to Off.
When CT-circuits are switched depending on the position of the busbar disconnectors
there is a possibility that some of the CT secondary circuits can be open circuited by
a mistake. At the same time this can cause unwanted operation of the differential
protection scheme.
For this reason, a so-called check zone is often required for a traditional highimpedance busbar protection scheme when switching in CT-circuit is done. The check
zone is fixed and has no switching of CTs in any of the outgoing circuits and is not
connected to busbar section and busbar coupler bays. The check zone, will detect
faults anywhere in the substation but can not distinguish in which part of the station
the fault is located. When the check zone detects a fault it gives a release signal to
the busbar protection relays in all individual, discriminating zones. The busbar
protection discriminating zones will than trip the part of the substation that is faulty.
However, this principle creates not only a high cost as separate CT cores are required,
but also a need for extra cabling and a separate check zone differential relay.
With the REB 670 IED, there is no need for an external check zone due to the
following facts:
122
the CT switching for REB 670 IED is made only in software, and CT secondary
current circuits do not include any auxiliary contacts, see figure 67.
the IED is always supplied with a special zone and phase selective Open CT
Detection algorithm, which can instantly block the differential function in case
of an open CT secondary circuits caused by accidents or mistakes.
internal check zone feature is available
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
This means that a very cost effective solution can be achieved with REB 670 IED,
producing extra savings during scheme engineering, installation, commissioning,
service and maintenance.
The pre-configured binary output contacts,are provided in the REB 670 IED in order
to alarm the open CT circuit condition. At the same time, one of the LEDs on the
built-in HMI can be programmed to light up. It shall be noted that the Open CT Circuit
alarm can only be manually reset by one of the three following ways:
1.
2.
3.
For more details about the working principles of the Open CT Detection algorithm,
please refer to Technical Reference Manual.
The contact outputs on REB 670 are of medium duty type. It is possible to use them
to directly trip the individual bay circuit breakers. This solution is suitable for all
types of station arrangements. The internal zone selection logic provides individual
bay trip signals in REB 670 internal software and no external relay for this purpose
are required. This arrangement insures correct trip signal distribution to all circuit
breakers in case of busbar protection operation or individual bay breaker failure
protection operation. Breaker fail protection can be internal or external to REB 670
IED.
By a parameter setting it is possible to provide self-rest or latched trip output contacts
from REB 670 IED. However it shall be noted that the latching is electrical (i.e. if dc
supply to the IED is lost the output contacts will reset).
However, sometimes due to a large number of required trip output contacts (i.e. single
pole operated circuit breakers and/or main and backup trip coils), a separate trip repeat
relay unit is applied for the tripping of the circuit breakers in the station. In that case
the tripping arrangement can be done in different ways as described below.
When one-phase version of the IED is used it is typically required to have three IEDs
(i.e. one per phase). Thus, when busbar protection in one IED operates the trip
commands will be given to all bays but internal circuit breaker failure function will
be started in the same phase only. In order to secure internal breaker failure starting
in all three phases it is advisable to do the following. Connect Zone A trip signal from
one IED to the external trip input of the Zone A in the other two IEDs. Thus all three
IEDs will then issue trip in Zone A and start internally circuit breaker failure
protection in all three phases.
Please note that:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
123
Section 4
IED application
IEC 61850
Port (OEM)
It shall be noted that in this case the external trip signal from other two IEDs shall be
arranged via pulse timer in configuration in order to avoid locking of the trip signal
between three IED. Such arrangement via GOOSE is given in figure 57:
ZoneA Trip
IED 670
50 ms
Ext ZoneA Trip
IED 670
IEC 61850
Port (OEM)
Switch
50 ms
Ext ZoneB Trip
50 ms
Ext ZoneA Trip
IED 670
IEC 61850
Port (OEM)
ZoneB Trip
50 ms
Ext ZoneB Trip
en06000227.vsd
Figure 57:
Tripping is performed directly from REB 670 contacts, which then activate an
auxiliary trip unit, which multiplies the number of required trip contacts. Separate
potential free contacts are provided for each bay and are supplied by the bay auxiliary
voltage and will activate the trip coil of each bay circuit breaker at operation. This
tripping setup is suitable when no individual circuit breaker failure relays or lock-out
of individual bay CB closing coils is required. A suitable external trip unit consists
of a combination of RXMS1/RXMH 2 when heavy duty contacts are required and
only RXMS 1 relays when medium duty contacts are sufficient.
124
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Decentralized trip arrangement
Tripping is performed directly from REB 670 contacts, which then activate dedicated
auxiliary trip unit per bay. This individual auxiliary trip unit can be mounted either
in the busbar protection cubicle or in the individual bay cubicles. This tripping setup
is suitable when individual circuit breaker failure relays exist in all bays. A suitable
external trip unit consists of a combination of RXMS1/RXMH 2 when heavy duty
contacts are required and only RXMS 1 relays when medium duty contacts are
sufficient.
This solution is especially suitable for the station arrangements which requires the
dynamic zone selection logic (i.e. so called CT switching).
The trip contacts will remain closed. If the breaker would fail to open the tripping
coil will be burnt and the DC supply short-circuited.
The trip circuit supervision (TCS) relays will reset and give alarm for a failure
in the trip circuit if the alarm is not opened by the lock-out relay or a double trip
circuit supervision is recommended where the trip circuit is supervised with two
alternatively, TCS relays.
There is sometimes a request for heavy duty trip relays. Normally the circuit breaker
trip coils, with a power consumption of 200 to 300 W, are provided with an auxiliary
contact opening the trip circuit immediately at breaker tripping. Therefore, no heavy
duty breaking capacity is required for the tripping relays. Nevertheless heavy duty
trip relays are still often specified to ensure trip circuit opening also if the circuit
breaker fails due to a mechanical failure or a lack of energy for operation. This can
particularly occur during site testing. In this case it is recommended to use
COMBIFLEX RXMH 2 or RXMVB 2 heavy duty relays.
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
125
Section 4
IED application
Trip circuit supervision is mostly required to supervise the trip circuit from the
individual bay relay panel to the circuit breaker. It can be arranged also for the tripping
circuits from the busbar protection.
However, it can be stated that the circuit from a busbar protection trip relay located
in the busbar protection panel is not so essential to supervise as busbar faults are very
rare compared to faults in bays, specially on overhead power lines. Also it is normally
a small risk for faults in the tripping circuit and if there is a fault it affects only one
bay and all other bays are thus correctly tripped meaning that the fault current
disappears or is limited to a low value.
4.5.1.3
The simplest form of busbar protection is a one-zone protection for single busbar
configuration, see figure 58. When different CT ratios exist in the bays compensation
is done by setting the CT ratio individually for each bay.
The only requirement for busbar protection is that the protection scheme must have
one differential zone. For any internal fault all circuit breakers must be tripped, which
will cause loss of supply to all loads connected to the station.
ZA
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
xx06000087.vsd
Figure 58:
With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be very easily protected. The most
common setups with REB 670 IED for this type of station are described in the
following table.
Table 25:
126
12
12
24
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Single busbar arrangements with sectionalizer
This arrangement is very similar to the single busbar arrangement. The sectionalizer
allows the operator to split the station into two separate buses. However switching of
the sectionalizing disconnector have to be done without any load. This means that
one of the two busbars has to be de-energized before any opening or closing of the
sectionalizer.
For this case the protection scheme must have two differential zones, which can be
either split to work independently from each other or switched to one overall
differential zone when sectionalizing disconnector is closed. Nevertheless, when
sectionalizer is closed, for internal fault on any of the two buses all feeder circuit
breakers have to be tripped, which will cause loss of supply to all loads connected to
this station.
QB1
ZA
ZB
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
xx06000012.vsd
Figure 59:
The most common setups with REB 670 IED for this type of station are described in
the following table.
Table 26:
Typical solutions for stations with two single busbar sections with bus-sectionalizing
disconnector
12
12
24
The two differential zones are available in REB 670 IED and the connecting of the
two zones is simply controlled via zone interconnection logic, see section "Zone
interconnection (Load transfer)" for more details. In practice the closed position of
the sectionalizer shall start the zone interconnection logic inside REB 670. All other
thinks (i.e. tripping) will automatically be arranged.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
127
Section 4
IED application
Single busbar arrangements with bus-section breaker
This arrangement is very similar to the single busbar arrangement. The bus-section
breaker allows the operator to split the station into two separate buses under full load.
The requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar section. In case of an internal fault
on one of the two sections, bus-section circuit breaker and all feeder circuit breakers
associated with this section have to be tripped, leaving the other busbar section in
normal operation.
ZA
ZB
QA1
BI1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
xx06000088.vsd
Figure 60:
With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be quite easily protected. The
most common setups with REB 670 IED for this type of station are described in the
following table.
Table 27:
3*)/6
1/2
7*)/14
1/2
11*)/22
3/6
11*)/22
3/6
23*)/46
3/6
For station with just one CT in the bus-section bay, it might be required, depending
on the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for disconnection of bussection CT when the bus-section CB is open. For more information see figure 50.
The H-type stations are often used in transmission and sub-transmission networks as
a load-centre substations, see figure 61. These arrangement are very similar to the
single busbar station with sectionalizer or bus-section breaker, but are characterized
by very limited number of feeder bays connected to the station (normally only two
OHL and two transformers).
128
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
01
02
BS
ZA
ZB
03
04
xx06000121.vsd
Figure 61:
The requirement for the busbar protection scheme for this type of station may differ
from utility to utility. It is possible to apply just one overall differential zone, which
protects both busbar sections. However, at an internal fault on any of the two buses
all feeder circuit breakers have to be tripped, which will cause loss of supply to all
loads connected to this station. Some utilities prefer to have two differential zones,
one for each bus section.
The most common setups with REB 670 IEDs for this type of station are given in the
following table.
Table 28:
Number of differential
Number of REB 670
zones/number of feeders IEDs required for the
per zone
scheme
1/4
2/3
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
For station with double zone protection and just one set of CTs in the bus-section bay,
it might be required, depending on the client requirements, to provide the special
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
129
Section 4
IED application
The circuit breaker, disconnectors and instrument transformers are duplicated for
every feeder, as shown in figure 62figure "".
ZA
ZB
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
xx06000018.vsd
Figure 62:
This is an extremely flexible solution. In normal service all breakers are closed. The
requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar. In case of an internal fault on
one of the two buses all circuit breakers associated with the faulty busbar have to be
tripped, but supply to any load will not be interrupted. The tripping logic for the circuit
breaker failure protection must be carefully arranged.
The most common setups with REB 670 IEDs for this type of busbar arrangement
are described in the following table.
Table 29:
4/8
1/2
6/12
3/6
6/12
3/6
12/24
3/6
A principle overall drawing of how to use REB 670 for this type of station is given
in figure 63.
130
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
REB 670
Bxxx
Zone A
BLKTR
CTRLZA
QA1
Feeder
CTRLZB
TRZONE
CT Input
BI1
1500/1
TRBAY
A/D
BBP &
BFP
TRIP
QA1
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
I3PB1
Other
Equipment
BOM
CT Input
Bxxx
BI2
1500/1
A/D
Other
Equipment
QA2
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
TRZONE
TRBAY
Zone B
TRIP
CONNZA
BBP &
BFP
TRIP
QA2
CONNZB
I3PB1
Double
breaker
BFP
Remote
Feeder
End
InterTrip
OR
en06000148.vsd
Figure 63:
A fewer number of circuit breakers are needed for the same flexibility as for double
circuit breaker busbar arrangement, see figure 64figure "".
ZA
QA1
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
QA3
QA3
QA1
BI1
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
BI3
QA3
QA3
QA3
ZB
xx06000017.vsd
Figure 64:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
131
Section 4
IED application
All breakers are normally closed. The requirement for the busbar protection scheme
is that the scheme must have two independent differential zones, one for each busbar.
In case of an internal fault on one of the two buses all circuit breakers associated with
the faulty busbar have to be tripped, but the supply to any load will not be interrupted.
The breaker failure protection tripping logic also needs careful design.
With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be very easily protected. The most
common setups with REB 670 IEDs for this type of station are described in the
following table.
Table 30:
Typical solutions for one-and-half circuit breaker stations when CBF for middle breaker
is not required
Number of diameters in
the station
2/4
1/2
4/8
1/2
6/12
3/6
6/12
3/6
12/24
3/6
A principle overall drawing of how to use REB 670 for one-and-half circuit
breaker station including internal CBF protection for middle breaker is given in
figure 65.
132
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
BFP
Remote
End
InterTrip
Feeder 1
REB 670
OR
Bxxx
Zone A
BLKTR
Feeder 1
BI1
2000/1
CONNZA
CTRLZB
TRM
QA1
TRIP
CTRLZA
BBP &
BFP
TRIP
QA1
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
TRBAY
A/D
I3PB1
Other
Equipment
Bxxx
BLKTR
ZERO- CTRLZA
BI2
2000/1
CONNZA
ZERO- CTRLZB
CT Input
QA2
BFP
TRIP
QA2
TRIP
CONNZB
A/D
TRZONE
Other
Equipment
OR
TRBAY
I3PB1
Feeder 2
CT Input
BI3
2000/1
QA3
Bxxx
A/D
Other
Equipment
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CONNZA
CTRLZB
QA3 Internal BFP
Backup Trip Command
CONNZB
TRZONE
TRBAY
Zone B
BBP &
BFP
TRIP
QA3
TRIP
I3PB1
1 breaker
Diameter
BFP
Remote
End
InterBOM
Trip
Feeder 2
OR
en06000149.vsd
Figure 65:
QB2 QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
QB1
QB2
BI1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
xx06000014.vsd
Figure 66:
This type of busbar arrangement is very common. It is often preferred for larger
installations. It provides good balance between maintenance work requirements and
security of supply. If needed, two busbars can be split during normal service. The
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
133
Section 4
IED application
requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar. In case of an internal fault on
one of the two buses, bus-coupler circuit breaker and all feeder circuit breakers
associated with the faulty bus have to be tripped, leaving other busbar still in normal
operation. Provision for zone selection, disconnector replica and zone interconnection
have to be included into the scheme design.
With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be protected as described in the
following table:
Table 31:
3*)
7*)
NA
NA
11*)
23*)
For station with just one CT in the bus-coupler bay, it might be required, depending
on the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for disconnection of buscoupler CT when the bus-coupler CB is open. For more info please refer to figure
50.
Some principle overall drawings of how to use REB 670 in this type of station are
given in figure 67 to figure 71.
134
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Main
contact
Aux. a
contact
Aux. b
contact
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed Open
QB1
SSxx
DISABLE
CLOSED
NO
OPEN
NC
ALARM
ba
REB 670
FORCED
QB2
SSxx
DISABLE
CLOSED
NO
OPEN
NC
ALARM
Set Parameter
ZoneSel="CtrlIncludes"
FORCED
BIM
External or Internal
Feeder BFP Backup Trip
Command
Feeder Backup
OC Trip
BI1
1200/1
QB9
A/D
Other
Equipment
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
QA1
Bxxx
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
TRM
Feeder Bay
Figure 67:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
135
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
Zone B
b
QB1
b
QB2
Set Parameter
ZoneSel="CtrlExcludes"
BIM
External or Internal
Feeder BFP Backup
Trip Command
Feeder Backup
OC Trip
BI1
1200/1
QB9
A/D
Other
Equipment
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
QA1
Bxxx
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
TRM
BBP & BFP trip command to feeder breaker
Feeder Bay
en06000152.vsd
Figure 68:
136
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
Zone B
REB 670
QB1
BLKTR
QB2
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
Other
Equipment
TRM
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
TRBAY
BI1
2400/1
A/D
I3PB1
QA1
BI2
2400/1
OR
External or Internal
Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command
Bus-Coupler
Bay
Bxxx
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
TRIP
CONNZA
BOM
CONNZB
TRZONE
CT Input
TRBAY
A/D
I3PB1
Parameter ZoneSel must
be set to "FixedToZB"
Other
Equipment
Figure 69:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
137
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
Zone B
REB 670
QB1
CB Closing
Signal
QB2
ba
QA1
t=1s
SSxx
DISABLE
CLOSED
NO
OPEN
NC
ALARM
BI1
2400/1
FORCED
BIM
Bxxx
BLKTR
CTRLZA
CTRLZB
External or Internal
Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command
Bus-Coupler
Bay
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
ZEROCUR
TRZONE
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip
CT Input
TRM
A/D
Other
Equipment
BBP & BFP trip command to Bus-Coupler breaker
en06000154.vsd
Figure 70:
138
Bus coupler bay with one CT and a&b aux. contact from CB
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Zone A
Zone B
REB 670
QB1
QB2
b
t=1s
t
QA1
&
BI1
2400/1
CB Closing
Signal
Bxxx
BLKTR
CTRLZA
BIM
CTRLZB
External or Internal
Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command
Bus-Coupler
Bay
TRIP
CONNZA
CONNZB
ZEROCUR
TRZONE
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip
CT Input
TRM
A/D
Other
Equipment
Figure 71:
Bus coupler bay with one CT and b aux. contact only from CB
This type of station is commonly used for GIS installations. It offers high operational
flexibility. For this type of stations, two schemes similar to the double busbar station
scheme can be used.
BI1
QA1
ZA1
ZA2
ZB1
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2
BI1
QA1
BI1
QA1
QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2
ZB2
BI1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
QA1
xx06000016.vsd
Figure 72:
With REB 670 this type of arrangement can be protected as described in the following
table.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
139
Section 4
IED application
Table 32:
Number of feeders on
Number of REB 670
each side of the station IEDs required for the
(excluding bus-coupler & scheme
bus-section bays)
NA
NA
5*)
NA
NA
9*)
21*)
Provision for zone selection, disconnector replica and zone interconnection have to
be included into the scheme design.
For station with just one CT in the bus-coupler or bus-section bays, it might be
required, depending on the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for
disconnection of bus-coupler or bus-section CT when the bus-coupler or bus-section
CB is open. For more info please refer to figure 50
QB2
QA1
QB7
QB1
QB2
QB7
QA1
BI1
BI1
QB2
QB1
QA1
BI1
QB7
QB20
QB1
QB2
QA1
QB7
QB1
QB2
QB7
QA1
BI1
BI1
xx06000015.vsd
Figure 73:
This type of busbar arrangement is very common in some countries. It provides good
balance between maintenance work requirements and security of supply. If needed,
two busbars can be split during normal service. Additionally any feeder CB can be
taken out for maintenance without interruption of supply to the end customers
connected to this feeder.
The requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar. In case of an internal fault on
one of the two buses, bus-coupler circuit breaker and all feeder circuit breakers
associated with the faulty bus have to be tripped, leaving other busbar still in normal
operation. In REB 670, when transfer bus is in operation it will be protected as an
integral part of one of the two internally available zones. Special attention shall be
given that appropriate logic for zone selection is done with help of graphical
140
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
configuration tool. At the same time, load transfer and possible transfer of trip signals
from the feeder under transfer to the transfer circuit breaker shall be arranged in
appropriate way as well. With REB 670 this type of busbar arrangement can be
protected as described in the following table:
Table 33:
Possible solutions for double busbar-single breaker with transfer bus arrangements
NA
NA
7*)
NA
NA
11*)
23*)
*)
with one set of CTs in bus-coupler bay and separate transfer and bus-coupler breaker
It shall be noted that for station layouts where combined transfer and bus-coupler bay
is used, as for example is shown in figure "", two REB 670 internal bay function
blocks must be allocated to such primary bay, reducing number of available feeder
bays. In such station maximum available number of feeder bays is less for one from
the values shown in table 33, on condition that just one main CT is available from
Bus-Coupler/Transfer bay. For station with just one CT in the bus-coupler bay, it
might be required, depending on the client requirements, to provide the logic scheme
for disconnection of bus-coupler CT when the bus-coupler CB is open. For more info
please refer to figure 50.
There are stations which are practically a combination between two normal types of
station arrangements, which are already previously described. Some typical examples
will be shown here:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
141
Section 4
IED application
ZA
QA1
QA1
BI1
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI1
QA2
BI3
BI3
QA3
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
QA1
QA3
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
BI3
QA3
QA3
QA3
ZB
QA1
QA2
BI1
BI2
xx06000123.vsd
Figure 74:
This type of stations can be encountered very often in practice. Usually the station is
arranged in such a way that double breaker bays can be, at a later stage, transformed
into one-and-half breaker setup. For busbar protection this type of station can be
protected in exactly the same way as one-and-half breaker stations described above.
The same type of REB 670 IEDs can be used, and same limitations regarding the
number of diameters apply.
ZA
ZB
QA1
QA2
QA1
QA2
BI1
BI2
BI1
BI2
QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
xx06000124.vsd
Figure 75:
In this type of arrangement the double breaker bay has in the same time the role of
the bus-coupler bay for normal double busbar single breaker stations. Therefore, zone
interconnection, zone selection and disconnector replica facilities have to be provided
for all double busbar bays. Because of the very specific requirements on zone
interconnection feature in REB 670, the following should be considered for this type
of application:
142
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
current inputs CT1 and CT2 shall be used for the first double breaker bay.
current inputs CT3 and CT4 shall be used for the second double breaker bay.
current inputs CT5 and CT6 shall be used for the third double breaker bay (only
available in 1ph version).
Accordingly the following solutions are possible with REB 670 IEDs:
Table 34:
Typical solutions for combination between double breaker and double busbar station
layouts
NA
NA
2/4
NA
NA
3/6
3/18
ZA
QA1
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI3
QA3
BI3
QA3
QA1
BI1
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
QA1
BI1
QA2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
BI3
QA3
QA3
QA3
ZB
QB1 QB2
QB1 QB2
QA1
QA1
BI1
BI1
xx06000125.vsd
Figure 76:
For this type of busbar arrangement the double busbar bay is usually connected to the
reactive power compensation equipment (i.e. shunt reactor or shunt capacitor). The
diameters in the one-and-half breaker part of the station have at the same time the
role of the bus-coupler bay. Therefore zone interconnection, zone selection and
disconnector replica facilities have to be provided for all double busbar bays.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
143
Section 4
IED application
4.5.1.4
Summation principle
Introduction
A simplified bus differential protection for phase and ground faults can be obtained
by using a single, one-phase REB 670 IED with external auxiliary summation current
transformers. By using this approach, more cost effective bus differential protection
can be obtained. Such a solution makes it feasible to apply bus differential protection
even to medium voltage substations. The principal differences between full, phasesegregated bus differential protection scheme and summation type bus differential
protection scheme with REB 670 are shown in figure 77.
Three one-phase
REB 670 IED
REB 670
REB 670
REB 670
Single one-phase
REB 670 IED
REB 670
with 1A
CT inputs
Auxiliary Summation CT *)
type SLCE 8; 1/1A, 2/1A or 5/1A
Up to 18 pcs
+ auxiliary CTs
Figure 77:
In the full, phase-segregated design three, one-phase REB 670 IEDs (i.e. one per
phase) are used. However for the summation type only single, one-phase REB 670
IED plus one auxiliary summation CT per each main CT is required. These auxiliary
summation CTs convert each main CT 3-phase currents to a single-phase output
current, which are all measured by one REB 670 IED. The differential calculation is
then made on a single-phase basis. By doing so, this more cost effective bus
differential protection can be applied. Due to this characteristic, this summation type
of bus differential protection with REB 670 can be applied for all types of stations
arrangements as shown section "Different busbar arrangements", for three, one-phase
IEDs.
As an example, the necessary equipment for the summation type, busbar differential
protection for a single busbar station with up to 24 bays, is shown in figure 78.
144
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
LA
LB
IA1
LX
IB1
IX1
Main CTs
A-bus
L1
L2
L3
IA2
L1
L2
L3
L1
IB2
L2
L3
IX2
Summation CTs
CT1
CT2
...
CT24
REB 670
with 1A
CT inputs
en06000127.vsd
Figure 78:
This summation type bus differential protection still has the same main CT
requirements as outlined in section "Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f.
requirements". Some of these are:
However, due to the summation principle this type of busbar protection scheme has
the following limitations:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
145
Section 4
IED application
Only one measuring circuit is utilized for all fault types (i.e. no redundancy for
multi-phase faults)
Primary fault sensitivity varies depending on the type of fault and involved
phase(s), see table 36
The load currents in the healthy phases might produce the stabilizing current
when an internal, single phase to ground fault occurs. However this is in general
no problem for solidly earthed systems with high earth-fault currents
No indication of faulty phase(s) in case of an internal fault
Not possible to fully utilize Open CT detection feature built-in in REB 670 IED
Auxiliary Summation Current Transformer (i.e. ASCT in further text) of the type
SLCE 8 is used with the summation principle of REB 670. The principle drawing of
one such ASCT is shown in figure 79.
Auxiliary Summation CT
type SLCE 8; X/1A
P1
N1
S1
P2
P3
N2
N4
P4
P5
N3
S2
P6
en03000118.vsd
Figure 79:
The ASCT has three primary windings and one secondary winding. In further text,
turn numbers of these windings will be marked with N1, N2, N3 & N4, respectively
(see figure 79 for more information).
There are three types of ASCT for REB 670:
1.
2.
3.
146
ASCT type with ratio 1/1A, for balanced 3-Ph current input, shall be used with
all main current transformers with 1A rated secondary current (i.e. 2000/1A)
ASCT type with ratio 5/1A, for balanced 3-Ph current input, shall be used with
all main current transformers with 5A rated secondary current (i.e. 3000/5A)
ASCT type with ratio 2/1A, for balanced 3-Ph current input, shall be used with
all main current transformers with 2A rated secondary current (i.e. 1000/2A)
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
All of these features simplify the ordering of the ASCTs. Practically, in order to
purchase ASCTs, the only required information is the main CT rated secondary
current (i.e. 1A, 2A or 5A).
Table 35 summarizes the ASCT data:
Table 35:
Type of fault
N1
N2
ASCT SLCE 8;
1/1A
52
52
104
90
33
1.0
ASCT SLCE 8;
5/1A
12
12
24
104
38
1.0
ASCT SLCE 8;
2/1A
26
26
52
90
33
1.0
N3
N4
Ukp [V]
Burden
[VA]
where:
N1, N2, N3 & N4 are ASCT windings turn numbers (see figure 79)
Ukp is knee point voltage, at 1.6T, of the secondary winding with N4 turns
Burden is the total 3Ph load of ASCT imposed to the main CT
Due to ASCT design, the ASCTs for summated bus differential
protection, must always be mounted as close as possible to the REB
670 IED (i.e. in the same protection cubicle).
It is possible to connect the ASCTs for summated bus differential protection with
REB 670:
at the end of the main CT circuit (e.g. beyond the other protective relays, see
figure 80
in series with other secondary equipment when some other relay must be located
at the end of the main CT circuit , see figure 81
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
147
Section 4
IED application
However, it should be noted that these two connection types must not be mixed. This
means that within one busbar installation all auxiliary summation CTs have to be
either end-connected or series-connected.
Typical end-connection with ASCT is shown in figure 80.
Main CT
2000/1A or 2000/5A
or 2000/2A
L1
IL1
Auxiliary Summation CT
type SLCE 8;
1/1A or 5/1A or 2/1A
ISUMM
P1
N1
IL2
L2
P2
Other
relays
L3
S1
X401
5
P3
AI03
N2
IL3
N4
6
P4
P5
N3
IN
S2
P6
en06000128.vsd
Figure 80:
It is important to notice that even in the case of 5A or 2A main CTs, secondary current
of the summation CTs shall be connected to REB 670 with 1A CT inputs (see
figure 80). The reason for this is that the rated secondary current of ASCT is always
1A irrespective of the rated secondary current of the main CT.
Please refer to section "SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for end-connection"for
detailed ASCT current calculations for end-connection.
Typical series-connection with ASCT is shown in figure 81.
148
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Main CT
2000/1A
or 2000/5A
or 2000/2A
L1
L2 L3
Other
relays
Auxiliary Summation CT
type SLCE 8; 1/1 or 5/1A or 2/1A
IL1
P1
N1
P2
P3
IL3
P4
P5
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
ISUMM
S1
N2
N4
N3
S2
A103
P6
Other
relays
IN
en06000129.vsd
Figure 81:
As stated before, three types of ASCTs for REB 670 are available. The first type shall
be used for main CTs with 1A rated secondary current. The second type shall be used
for main CTs with 5A rated secondary current. The third type shall be used with 2A
main CTs. However REB 670 with 1A CT inputs is always used. Therefore main CT
ratio shall always be set in such a way that the primary current is entered as for the
main CT, but secondary current is always entered as 1A (i.e. 3000/5 main CT will be
entered as 3000/1 CT in REB 670).
In the REB 670 differential IED, the minimal differential operating current level is
entered directly in primary amperes. However, as stated previously, in case of the
summated differential protection the primary fault sensitivity varies depending on the
type of fault and involved phase(s). The entered value, for the minimal differential
operating current level, will exactly correspond to the REB 670 pickup value in the
event of a 3-phase internal fault. For all other fault types this value must be multiplied
by a coefficient shown in the table 36 in order to calculate the actual primary pickup
value.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
149
Section 4
IED application
Table 36:
Type of fault
L1-Gnd
L2-Gnd
L3-Gnd
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
ASCT end
connected
0.434
0.578
ASCT series
connected
1.732
0.867
L1L2L3
0.867
1.732
1.732
0.867
1.0
0.578
1.732
1.732
0.867
1.0
The coefficients in table 36 are only relevant for ideal internal faults
(i.e. load currents do not exist in the healthy phases).
Example 1:
The minimal differential operating current level in REB 670 IED is set to 1250A. All
ASCTs are series connected. What is the theoretical primary pickup value in case of
L3-Gnd fault?
Answer 1:
According to table 36, pickup coefficient for this type of ASCT connection and this
type of fault is 0.578. Therefore:
I Pickup ( L3 Gnd ) = 0.578 1250 = 722.5A
(Equation 26)
This means that if 722.5 primary amperes is injected only in phase L3 of any of the
connected main CTs, REB 670 shall display the differential current of 1250A
(primary) and should be on the point of the pickup (i.e. trip).
In addition to BBP differential zones, REB 670 can incorporate other additional
functions and features. If and how they can be used together with summation BBP
design is shown in table 37:
150
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 37:
Internal features
Comment
RBRF function
POCM function
POCM function
RDRE function
RDRE function
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
151
Section 4
IED application
REB 670 Internal Feature
Comment
RDRE function
Communication
RREC function
Typical ASCT end-connection is shown in figure 80. For this ASCT connection type,
the ampere-turn balance equation has the form according to equation 27:
N4 I SUMM = N1 IL1 + N2 ( IL1 + IL2 ) + N3 ( IL1 + IL2 + IL3 )
(Equation 27)
The relationships between number of turns for this SLCE 8, ASCT for REB 670, is
shown in equation 28, equation 29 and equation 30:
N1 = N2 = N;
(Equation 28)
N3 = 2 N
N4 = k
(Equation 29)
3N
(Equation 30)
where:
k
The well-known relationship, between positive, negative and zero sequence current
components and individual phase current quantities is shown in equation 31:
IL1
IL2 = a
IL3
1 I2
I1
I0
(Equation 31)
where:
a
152
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
By including equation 28, equation 29, equation 30 and equation 31 into the
equation 27 the equation for the end-connected, ASCT secondary current (i.e.
summated current) can be derived according to equation 32:
1
-j30
j30
I SUMM = --- ( I 1 e
+ I2 e
+ 3 3 I0)
k
(Equation 32)
From equation 32 it is obvious that the ASCT rated ratio is declared for balanced
three phase current system, when only positive sequence current component exist.
For any unbalanced condition (i.e. external or internal fault), both negative and zero
sequence current components will give their own contribution to the summated
current.
Typical ASCT series-connection is shown in figure 81. For this ASCT connection
type, the ampere-turn balance equation has the form according to equation 33:
N4 ISUMM = N1 IL1 N2 IL3 N3 ( IL1 + IL2 + IL3 )
(Equation 33)
The relationships between number of turns for this SLCE 8 ASCT for REB 670, is
shown in equation 34, equation 35, equation 36:
N1 = N2 = N;
(Equation 34)
N3 = 2 N
N4 = k
(Equation 35)
3N
(Equation 36)
where:
k
The well-known relationship, between positive, negative and zero sequence current
components and individual phase current quantities is shown in equation 37:
IL1
IL2 = a
IL3
1 I2
I1
I0
(Equation 37)
where:
a
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
153
Section 4
IED application
By including equation 34, equation 35, equation 36 and equation 37 into the
equation 33 the equation for the series-connected, ASCT secondary current (i.e.
summated current) can be derived according to equation 38:
-j30
j30
1
+ I2 e
+ 2 3 I0)
I SUMM = --- ( I 1 e
k
(Equation 38)
From equation 38 it is obvious that the ASCT rated ratio is declared for balanced
three phase current system, when only positive sequence current component exist.
For any unbalanced condition (i.e. external or internal fault), both negative and zero
sequence current components will give their own contribution to the summated
current.
4.5.1.5
Setting parameters
All general settings for busbar differential protection are only relevant for proper
event reporting via IEC 61850-8-1. They are not important for proper operation of
busbar differential protection.
However, please note that all settings for busbar protection under relevant parameter
setting group are directly related to proper operation of the busbar differential
protection.
Table 38:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IINL1 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IINL1 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
IINL1 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
IINL1 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IINL1 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IINL1 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
IINL1 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IINL1 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IINL1 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IINL1 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
154
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IINL2 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IINL2 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
IINL2 L2hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
IINL2 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IINL2 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IINL2 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
IINL2 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IINL2 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IINL2 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IINL2 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
IINL3 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IINL3 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
IINL3 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
IINL3 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IINL3 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.00
Low limit
IINL3 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
IINL3 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IINL3 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IINL3 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IINL3 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
IDL1 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
155
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IDL1 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
IDL1 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
IDL1 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IDL1 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IDL1 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
IDL1 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IDL1 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IDL1 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IDL1 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
IDL2 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IDL2 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
IDL2 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
IDL2 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IDL2 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IDL2 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
IDL2 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IDL2 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IDL2 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IDL2 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
IDL3 db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IDL3 zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
156
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IDL3 hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
IDL3 hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IDL3 lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IDL3 llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
IDL3 min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IDL3 max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IDL3 dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IDL3 limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
Table 39:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Differential protection
operation
DiffOperLev
1 - 99999
1000
Differential protection
operation level in
primary amperes
DiffTripOut
SelfReset
Latched
SelfReset
Differential protection
trip output mode
tTripHold
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
CheckZoneSup
Off
On
Off
Check zone
supervises differential
protection operation
SlowOCTOper
Off
Block
Supervise
Block
Operation of slow
open CT alarm
FastOCTOper
Off
Block
Supervise
Block
OCTOperLev
1 - 99999
200
Open CT operation
level in primary
amperes
tSlowOCT
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
20.00
OCTReleaseLev
1 - 99999
2500
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
157
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IdAlarmLev
1 - 99999
200
Differential current
alarm level in primary
amperes
tIdAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
IinAlarmLev
1 - 99999
3000
Incoming current
alarm level in primary
amperes
SensDiffOper
Off
On
Off
Sensitive differential
protection operation
SensOperLev
1 - 99999
200
Sensitive differential
operation level in
primary amperes
SensIinBlock
1 - 99999
1000
tSensDiff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Table 40:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IIN db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
IIN zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
IIN hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
IIN hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
IIN lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
IIN llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
IIN min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
IIN max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
IIN dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
IIN limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
ID db
0 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Deadband value in %
of range (in %s if
integral is used)
158
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ID zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
ID hhLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
5000.000
ID hLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
3000.000
High limit
ID lLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Low limit
ID llLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
50.000
ID min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
25.000
Minimum value
ID max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
6000.000
Maximum value
ID dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
(0=cyclic, 1=db,
2=integral db)
ID limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
Table 41:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Differential protection
operation
DiffOperLev
1 - 99999
1000
Differential protection
operation level in
primary amperes
DiffTripOut
SelfReset
Latched
SelfReset
Differential protection
trip output mode
tTripHold
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
CheckZoneSup
Off
On
Off
Check zone
supervises differential
protection operation
SlowOCTOper
Off
Block
Supervise
Block
Operation of slow
open CT alarm
FastOCTOper
Off
Block
Supervise
Block
OCTOperLev
1 - 99999
200
Open CT operation
level in primary
amperes
tSlowOCT
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
20.000
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
159
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
OCTReleaseLev
1 - 99999
2500
IdAlarmLev
1 - 99999
200
Differential current
alarm level in primary
amperes
tIdAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.000
IinAlarmLev
1 - 99999
3000
Incoming current
alarm level in primary
amperes
SensDiffOper
Off
On
Off
Sensitive differential
protection operation
SensOperLev
1 - 99999
200
Sensitive differential
operation level in
primary amperes
SensIinBlock
1 - 99999
1000
tSensDiff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Table 42:
Parameter
Step
Description
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
OperLevel
1 - 99999
1000
Slope
0.00 - 0.90
0.01
0.15
Table 43:
Parameter
160
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
OperLevel
0 - 99999
1000
Slope
0.00 - 0.90
0.01
0.15
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 44:
Parameter
SwitchName
Table 45:
Parameter
Range
0 - 13
Step
1
Default
Switch#
Unit
-
Description
User defined name for
switch
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OperMode
Off
Scheme1_RADSS
Scheme2_INX
ForceOpen
ForceClosed
Off
Switch operating
mode (Scheme 1,
Scheme 2 or forced)
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
15.00
Table 46:
Parameter
BAY01
Table 47:
Parameter
REB 670
Step
1
Default
BayName01
Unit
-
Description
User defined name for
bay
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTConnection
Conn Inverted
NotConnected
Connected
Connected
Hardware CT input
connection to the bay
function block
ZoneSel
FixedToZA
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
CtrlIncludes
How bay/CT is
controlled toward the
zones
ZoneSwitching
ForceOut
ForceIn
Conditionally
ForceIn
CheckZoneSel
NotConnected
Connected
NotConnected
tTripPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tZeroCurrent
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tInvertCurrent
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
161
Section 4
IED application
Table 48:
Parameter
BAY01
Table 49:
Parameter
Range
0 - 13
Step
1
Default
BayName01
Unit
-
Description
User defined name for
bay
Step
Default
Unit
Description
CTConnection
Conn Inverted
NotConnected
Connected
Connected
Hardware CT input
connection to the bay
function block
ZoneSel
FixedToZA
FixedToZB
FixedToZA&-ZB
CtrlIncludes
CtrlExcludes
CtrlIncludes
How bay/CT is
controlled toward the
zones
ZoneSwitching
ForceOut
ForceIn
Conditionally
ForceIn
CheckZoneSel
NotConnected
Connected
NotConnected
tTripPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tZeroCurrent
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tInvertCurrent
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Table 50:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Load Transfer/Zone
Interconnection
operation
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
300.00
Table 51:
Parameter
162
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Load Transfer/Zone
Interconnection
operation
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
300.00
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.6
Current protection
4.6.1
ANSI number: 51
IEC 61850 logical node name:
OC4PTOC
4.6.1.1
3I>
4
4
alt
Application
The phase overcurrent protection function is used in several applications in the power
system. Some applications are:
In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time
delays are needed. TOC can have up to four different, individual settable, steps. The
flexibility of each step of the TOC function is great. The following options are
possible:
Non-directional / Directional function: In most applications the non-directional
functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from
the protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance,
the directional function can be necessary.
Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of delay time
characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time
delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is
normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different
protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated
against each other, should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
163
Section 4
IED application
range of standardised inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is
also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic.
Normally it is required that the phase overcurrent function shall reset as fast as
possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases
some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics
can be used.
For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up
level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to
a large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly
larger than the rated current of the motor. Therefore there is a possibility to give a
setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor
is activated from a binary input signal to the function.
Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This
phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the
period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current
of the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic
content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore
the TOC function have a possibility of second harmonic restrain if the level of this
harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current.
The phase overcurrent protection is often used as protection for two and three phase
short circuits. In some cases it is not wanted to detect single-phase earth faults by the
phase overcurrent protection. This fault type is detected and cleared after operation
of earth fault protection. Therefore it is possible to make a choice how many phases,
at minimum, that have to have current above the pick-up level, to enable operation.
If set 1 of 3 it is sufficient to have high current in one phase only. If set 2 of 3 or
3 of 3 single-phase earth faults are not detected.
4.6.1.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the four step phase overcurrent protection function (TOC) are set
via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
The following settings can be done for the four step phase overcurrent protection.
MeasType: Selection of discrete Fourier filtered (DFT) or true RMS filtered (RMS)
signals Operation: Off/On
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current of
the protected object.
UBase: Base voltage level in kV. This voltage is give as a phase-to-phase voltage and
this is the reference for voltage related settings of the function. Normally the setting
should be chosen to the rated phase-to-phase voltage of the voltage transformer
feeding the protection IED.
164
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
AngleRCA: Protection characteristic angle set in degrees. If the angle of the fault loop
current has the angle RCA the direction to fault is forward.
AngleROA: Angle value, given in degrees, to define the angle sector of the directional
function, see figure 82.
IminOpPhSel: Minimum current for phase selection set in % of IBase. This setting
should be less than the lowest step setting. Default setting is 7%.
StartPhSel: Number of phases, with high current, required for operation. The setting
possibilities are: 1 of 3, 2 of 3 and 3 of 3. Default setting is 1 of 3.
2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the
fundamental current. The setting range is 5-100% I steps of 1%. Default setting is
20%.
HarmRestrain: Off/On, enables blocking from harmonic restrain.
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 82:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
165
Section 4
IED application
Settings for each step (x = 1-4)
Curve name
10
IEC Inverse
11
12
13
14
15
User Programmable
17
ASEA RI
18
RXIDG (logarithmic)
19
166
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting
range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s.
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By
choosing setting the possibilities are according to table 53.
Table 53:
Reset possibilities
Curve name
Instantaneous
The delay characteristics are described in the Technical reference manual. There
are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.
For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time
settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1-4 and 6-8) all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset)
and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9-14) the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three
types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set
constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current
dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given.
HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk if power transformer
inrush currents might cause unwanted trip. Can be set Off/On.
tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time
characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). See equation 39 for the time characteristic
equation.
+ B IxMult
t [s] =
i p
-C
in >
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
(Equation 39)
167
Section 4
IED application
4.6.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 54:
Parameter
MeasType
Table 55:
Parameter
Step
-
Default
DFT
Unit
-
Description
Selection between
DFT and RMS
measurement
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Base voltage
AngleRCA
40 - 65
55
Deg
Relay characteristic
angle (RCA)
AngleROA
40 - 89
80
Deg
StartPhSel
Not Used
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases
required for op (1 of 3,
2 of 3, 3 of 3)
DirMode1
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 1 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist1
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 1
168
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
I1>
1 - 2500
1000
%IB
Phase current
operate level for step1
in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirMode2
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 2 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist2
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 2
I2>
1 - 2500
500
%IB
Phase current
operate level for step2
in % of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
DirMode3
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 3 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
169
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Characterist3
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 3
I3>
1 - 2500
250
%IB
Phase current
operate level for step3
in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 3
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirMode4
Off
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of
step 4 (off, nodir,
forward, reverse)
Characterist4
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 4
I4>
1 - 2500
175
%IB
Phase current
operate level for step4
in % of IBase
170
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 4
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Table 56:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IMinOpPhSel
1 - 100
%IB
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
%IB
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 1
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
171
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
HarmRestrain1
Off
On
Off
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 2
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
HarmRestrain2
Off
On
Off
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 3
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
172
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
HarmRestrain3
Off
On
Off
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 4
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
173
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.6.2
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
HarmRestrain4
Off
On
Off
ANSI number: 51
IEC 61850 logical node name:
PH4SPOCM
4.6.2.1
I>
4
4
alt
Application
The phase overcurrent protection function is used in several applications in the power
system. Some applications are:
The single phase overcurrent protection is used in IEDs having only input from one
phase, for example busbar protection for large busbars (with many bays).
In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time
delays are needed. OC can have up to four different, individual settable, steps. The
flexibility of each step of the OC function is great. The following options are possible:
Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of delay time
characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time
delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is
normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different
protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated
174
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
against each other, should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide
range of standardised inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is
also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic.
Normally it is required that the phase overcurrent function shall reset as fast as
possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases
some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics
can be used.
For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up
level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to
a large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly
larger then the rated current of the motor. Therefore there is a possibility to give a
setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor
is activated from a binary input signal to the function.
Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This
phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the
period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current
of the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic
content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore
the TOC function have a possibility of second harmonic restrain if the level of this
harmonic current reaches a value above a set percentage of the fundamental current.
4.6.2.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the four step phase overcurrent protection function (OC) are set
via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
The following settings can be done for the four step phase overcurrent protection.
Operation: Off/On
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the protected
object.
2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the
fundamental current. The setting range is 5-100% I steps of 1%. Default setting is
20%.
HarmRestrainx: Disabled/Enabled, enables blocking from harmonic restrain.
Characteristx: Selection of time delay characteristic for step x. Definite time delay
and different types of inverse time delay characteristics are available according to
table 57.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
175
Section 4
IED application
Table 57:
Curve name
10
IEC Inverse
11
12
13
14
15
User Programmable
17
ASEA RI
18
RXIDG (logarithmic)
19
176
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 58:
Reset possibilities
Curve name
Instantaneous
The delay characteristics are described in the Technical reference manual. There
are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.
For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time
settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1-4 and 6-8) all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset)
and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9-14) the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three
types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set
constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current
dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given.
HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk if power transformer
inrush currents might cause unwanted trip. Can be set Off/On.
tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time
characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). See equation 40 for the time characteristic
equation.
A
IxMult
+
t [s] =
B
i p
-C
in >
(Equation 40)
If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the transformer core will saturate
during part of the period, resulting in an inrush transformer current. This will give a
declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating between
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
177
Section 4
IED application
the phases. There is a risk that the phase overcurrent function will give an unwanted
trip. The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic component. This
component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this unwanted function.
The settings for the 2nd harmonic restrain are described below.
2ndHarmStab: The rate of second harmonic current content for activation of the
2nd harmonic restrain signal, to block chosen steps. The setting is given in % of the
fundamental frequency residual current. The setting range is 5-100% in step of 1%.
The default setting is 20%.
HarmRestrainx: This parameter can be set Off/On, disable or enable the 2nd harmonic
restrain.
The four-step phase overcurrent protection can be used in different ways, depending
on the application where the protection is used. A general description is given below.
The pick up current setting inverse time protection or the lowest current step constant
inverse time protection must be given a current setting so that the highest possible
load current does not cause protection operation. Here consideration also has to be
taken to the protection reset current, so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause
operation of the protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon
is described in figure 83.
Current I
Reset current
Time t
en05000203.vsd
Figure 83:
178
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
I pu 1.2
I max
k
(Equation 41)
where:
1.2
is a safety factor,
Imax
The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From operation statistics
the load current up to the present situation can be found. The current setting must be
valid also for some years ahead. It is, in most cases, realistic that the setting values
are updated not more often than once every five years. In many cases this time interval
is still longer. Investigate the maximum load current that different equipment on the
line can withstand. Study components such as line conductors, current transformers,
circuit breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer of the equipment normally
gives the maximum thermal load current of the equipment.
There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover,
must be detected by the phase overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current
Iscmin, to be detected by the protection, must be calculated. Taking this value as a
base, the highest pick up current setting can be written according to equation 42.
I pu 0.7 I sc min
(Equation 42)
where:
0.7
Iscmin
As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval stated in
equation 43.
1.2
I max
I pu 0.7 I sc min
k
(Equation 43)
The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short delay
of the operation, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to
other protection in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults
within as large portion as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by
the protection (primary protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest
current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone.
Considerations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possible
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
179
Section 4
IED application
DC component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the most
rapid stage, of the phase overcurrent protection, can be written according to
(Equation 44)
where:
1.2
is a safety factor,
kt
is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current
and can be considered to be less than 1.1
Iscmax
is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.
The operate times of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the
fault time is so short so that equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal overload,
at the same time as selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection, in a radial fed
network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the
case of inverse time overcurrent protection. In the figure below is shown how the
time-versus-current curves are plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get
the shortest fault time with maintained selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time
difference between the curves is larger than a critical time difference.
en05000204.wmf
Figure 84:
180
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection. To assure
selectivity between different protective protections, in the radial network, there have
to be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. The
minimum time difference can be determined for different cases. To determine the
shortest possible time difference between we must have knowledge about operation
time of protections, breaker opening time and protection resetting time. These time
delays can vary significantly between different pieces of equipment. The following
time delays can be estimated:
protection operation time:
15-60 ms
15-60 ms
20-120 ms
Example
Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as
shown in the figure below. We study a fault located at another line from the station
B. The fault current to the overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that
the protection will have instantaneous function. The overcurrent protection of IED
A1 must have a delayed function. The sequence of events during the fault can be
described using a time axis, see figure 85.
A1
B1
I>
I>
Feeder
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
The fault
occurs
Protection
B1 trips
Breaker at
B1 opens
Protection
A1 resets
en05000205.vsd
Figure 85:
where:
REB 670
t=0
t=t1
is the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent. Operation time of this
protection is t1,
t=t2
is the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t2 - t1 and
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
181
Section 4
IED application
t=t3
is the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t3 - t2.
To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1, is selective to the overcurrent
protection at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger that the time t3.
There are uncertainties in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening
time and protection resetting time. Therefor a safety margin has to be included. With
normal values the needed time difference can be calculated according to
equation 45.
Dt 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
(Equation 45)
4.6.2.3
is 100 ms
is 40 ms and
is 40 ms
Setting parameters
Table 59:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
OpStep1
Off
On
On
Operation over
current step 1 Off / On
Characterist1
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 1
I1>
1 - 2500
1000
%IB
Operate phase
current level for step1
in % of IBase
182
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
t1
Range
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
0.000
Description
Independent
(defenitive) time delay
of step 1
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I1Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for step 1
OPStep2
Off
On
On
Operation over
current step 2 Off / On
Characterist2
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 2
I2>
1 - 2500
500
%IB
Operate phase
current level for step2
in %of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Independent
(defenitive) time delay
of step 2
k2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I2Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for step 2
OpStep3
Off
On
On
Operation over
current step 3 Off / On
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
183
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Characterist3
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 3
I3>
1 - 2500
250
%IB
Operate phase
current level for step3
in %of Ibase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
Independent
(definitive) time delay
for step 3
k3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I3Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for step 3
OpStep4
Off
On
On
Operation over
current step 4 Off / On
Characterist4
Selection of time
delay curve type for
step 4
I4>
1 - 2500
175
%IB
Operate phase
current level for step4
in % of IBase
184
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Independent
(definitive) time delay
of step4
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
I4Mult
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate
time for IEC IDMT
curves for step 4
Table 60:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Step
Default
Unit
Description
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
%IB
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
185
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
HarmRestrain1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 2
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
HarmRestrain2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 3
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
186
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Step
Default
tBCrv3
Range
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Unit
-
Description
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 3
HarmRestrain3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset
curve type for step 4
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
187
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.6.3
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 4
HarmRestrain4
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
4.6.3.1
3I>BF
Application
In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means
that a fault shall be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker.
It is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker
for the protected component. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.
The breaker protection function will issue a back-up trip command to adjacent circuit
breakers in case of failure to trip of the normal circuit breaker for the protected
component. The detection of failure to break the current through the breaker is made
by means of current measurement or as detection of remaining trip signal
(unconditional).
The breaker failure protection can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip
signal is sent to the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to
increase the probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid backup trip of many breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and test.
4.6.3.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the breaker failure protection function (BFP) are set via the local
HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
188
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.
Operation: Off/On
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current
transformer where the current measurement is made.
FunctionMode: This parameter can be set Current/Contact. This states the way the
detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current
measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of
start signal (trip) is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current and
Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable
in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can
be the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse power
protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed.
BuTripMode: Back-up trip mode is given to state sufficient current criteria to detect
failure to break. For Current operation 2 out of 4 means that at least 2 currents, of the
three phase currents and the residual current, shall be high to indicate breaker failure.
1 out of 3 means that at least 1 current of the three phase currents shall be high to
indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 4 means that at least 1 current of the three phase
currents or the residual current shall be high to indicate breaker failure. In most
applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient. For Contact operation means back-up trip is done
when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used).
RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off
means that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position
check) and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level
to allow re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Contact means
re-trip is done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CB Pos
Check means re-trip is done without check of breaker position.
IP>: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This parameter
should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The setting can
be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker
failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.
I>BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used this function can
be blocked if any phase current is larger than this setting level. If the
FunctionMode is set Current and Contact breaker failure for high current faults are
safely detected by the current measurement function. To increase security the contact
based function should be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within
the range 5 200% of IBase.
IN>: Residual current level for detection of breaker failure set in % of IBase. In high
impedance earthed systems the residual current at phase to earth faults are normally
much smaller than the short circuit currents. In order to detect breaker failure at singlephase earth faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual current
separately. Also in effectively earthed systems the setting of the earth fault current
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
189
Section 4
IED application
protection can be chosen to relatively low current level. The BuTripMode is set 1 out
of 4. The current setting should be chosen in accordance to the setting of the sensitive
earth fault protection. The setting can be given within he range 2 200 % of IBase.
t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 60 s in
steps of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 50 ms.
t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as
possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is
90 150 ms (also dependent of re-trip timer).
The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:
(Equation 46)
where:
tcbopen
tBFP_reset
is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the current
criteria reset)
tmargin
is a safety margin
It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical
time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case
of a fault close to a power plant.
Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen
The fault
occurs
Retrip delay t1
Time
Trip and Start
BFP
en05000479.vsd
Figure 86:
190
Time sequence
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
t2MPh: Time delay of the back-up trip at multi-phase start. The critical fault clearance
time is often shorter in case of multi-phase faults, compared to single phase to earth
faults. Therefore there is a possibility to reduce the back-up trip delay for multi-phase
faults. Typical setting is 90 150 ms.
t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications
there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping
different back-up circuit breakers.
tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There
is a binary input CBFLT from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when
internal supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to
clear fault. This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker,
of others. After the set time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair
the circuit breaker. The time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the CBFLT is
active. Typical setting is 2.0 seconds.
tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time
of circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting
is 200 ms.
4.6.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 61:
Parameter
REB 670
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Base current
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
IP>
5 - 200
10
%IB
Operate phase
current level in % of
IBase
IN>
2 - 200
10
%IB
Operate residual
current level in % of
IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
t2MPh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
191
Section 4
IED application
Table 62:
Parameter
4.6.4
Step
Default
Unit
Description
I>BlkCont
5 - 200
20
%IB
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
4.6.4.1
I>BF
Application
In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means
that a fault shall be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker.
It is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker
for the protected component. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.
The breaker failure protection function will issue a back-up trip command to adjacent
circuit breakers in case of failure to trip of the normal circuit breaker for the
protected component. The detection of failure to break the current through the breaker
is made by means of current measurement or as detection of remaining trip signal
(unconditional).
The breaker failure protection can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip
signal is sent to the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to
increase the probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid backup trip of many breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and test.
4.6.4.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the breaker failure protection function (BFP) are set via the local
HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.
192
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Operation: Off/On
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the current
transformer where the current measurement is made.
FunctionMode: This parameter can be set Current/Contact. This states the way the
detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current
measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of
start signal (trip) is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current and
Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable
in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can
be the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse power
protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed.
RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off
means that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position
check) and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level
to allow re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Conntact means
retrip is done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CB Pos
Check means re-trip is done without check of breaker position.
IP>: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This parameter
should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The setting can
be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker
failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.
I>BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used this function can
be blocked if the current is larger than this setting level. If the FunctionMode is set
Current and Contact breaker failure for high current faults are safely detected by the
current measurement function. To increase security the contact based function should
be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within the range 5 200% of
IBase.
t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 60 s in
steps of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 50 ms.
t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as
possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting i
90 150 ms (also dependent of re-trip timer).
The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
(Equation 47)
193
Section 4
IED application
where:
tcbopen
tBFP_reset
is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the current
criteria reset)
tmargin
is a safety margin
It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical
time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case
of a fault close to a power plant.
Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen
The fault
occurs
Retrip delay t1
Time
Trip and Start
BFP
en05000479.vsd
Figure 87:
Time sequence
t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications
there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping
different back-up circuit breakers.
tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There
is a binary input CBFLT from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when
internal supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to
clear fault. This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker,
of others. After the set time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair
the circuit breaker. The time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the CBFLT is
active. Typical setting is 2.0 seconds.
tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time
of circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting
is 200 ms.
194
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.6.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 63:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
RetripMode
Retrip Off
I> Check
No I> Check
Retrip Off
IP>
5 - 200
10
%IB
Operate level in % of
IBase
I>BlkCont
5 - 200
20
%IB
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
Additional delay to t2
for a second back-up
trip
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
4.7
Control
4.7.1
ANSI number: 79
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SMBRREC
4.7.1.1
O->I
Application
In certain countries is standard practice to provid delayed restoration after busbar
protection (BBP) operation for internal fault, reason being that even many busbar
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
195
Section 4
IED application
faults are of the transient natures (i.e. animals, birds, storm, flying objects, etc.). In
such applications typically one pre-selected feeder is automatically closed with
certain time delay in order to try to re-energize the faulty bus. Typically the longest
overhead line is selected in order to limit the fault current in case of permanent busbar
fault. If the first feeder is successfully closed, all other feeder which have been
connected to the same bus, are automatically put back into service. Sensitive
differential protection level available in REB 670 can be used during such operation,
if increased sensitivity from BBP is required. Such busbar restoration logic can be
implemented in REB 670 graphical configuration tool by using optionally available
autoreclosing functions and built-in logical gates. Two autoreclosing functions are
available, one for each zone.
Automatic reclosing is a well-established method for the restoration of service in a
power system after a transient line fault. The majority of line faults are flashover arcs,
which are transient by nature. When the power line is switched off by the operation
of line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionizes and recovers its ability to
withstand voltage at a somewhat variable rate. Thus a certain dead time with a deenergized line is necessary. Line service can then be resumed by automatic reclosing
of the line breakers. The dead time selected should be long enough to ensure a high
probability of arc de-ionization and successful reclosing.
For individual line breakers, auto-reclosing equipment or functions, the autoreclosing open time is used to determine line dead time. When simultaneous
tripping and reclosing at the two line ends occurs, auto-reclosing open time is
approximately equal to the line dead time. If the open time and dead time differ
then the line will be energized until the breakers at both ends have opened.
196
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Resets
Operates
Fault
Resets
Operates
Line
protection
Instant of fault
Section 4
IED application
Operate time
Operate time
Closed
Circuit
breaker
Open
Close command
Contact closed
Fault duration
Reclaim time
Reclosing
command
Auto-reclosing
function
Break time
AR reset
Fault duration
Closing time
Are extinguishers
Contacts separated
Trip command
Break time
en04000146.vsd
Figure 88:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
197
Section 4
IED application
the residual current protections (earth fault protection) with the single pole tripping
and the auto-reclosing function. Attention shall also be paid to pole
discrepancy (pole discordance) that arises when circuit breakers are provided with
single pole operating devices. These breakers need pole discrepancy protection. They
must also be coordinated with the single pole auto-recloser and blocked during the
dead time when a normal discrepancy occurs. Alternatively they should use a trip
time longer than the set single phase dead time.
For the individual line breakers and auto-reclosing equipment, the auto-reclosing
open time expression is used. This is the dead time setting for the Auto-Recloser.
During simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, auto-reclosing open
time is approximately equal to the line dead time. Otherwise these two times may
differ as one line end might have a slower trip than the other end which means that
the line will not be dead until both ends have opened.
If the fault is permanent, the line protection will trip again when reclosing is attempted
in order to clear the fault.
It is common to use one automatic reclosing function per line circuit-breaker (CB).
When one CB per line end is used, then there is one auto-reclosing function per line
end. If auto-reclosing functions are included in duplicated line protection, which
means two auto-reclosing functions per CB, one should take measures to avoid
uncoordinated reclosing commands. In one and a half breaker, double-breaker and
ring bus arrangements, two CBs per line end are operated. One auto-reclosing
function per CB is recommended. Arranged in such a way, sequential reclosing of
the two CBs can be arranged with a priority circuit available in the auto-reclose
function. In case of a permanent fault and unsuccessful reclosing of the first CB,
reclosing of the second CB is cancelled and thus the stress on the power system is
limited. Another advantage with the breaker connected auto-recloser is that checking
that the breaker closed before the sequence, breaker prepared for an autoreclose
sequence etc. is much simpler.
The auto-reclosing function can be selected to perform single-phase and/or threephase automatic-reclosing from several single-shot to multiple-shot reclosing
programs. The three-phase auto-reclosing open time can be set to give either HighSpeed automatic reclosing (HSAR) or Delayed Automatic-Reclosing (DAR). These
expressions, HSAR and DAR, are mostly used for three-phase Reclosing as single
phase is always high speed to avoid maintaining the unsymmetrical condition. HSAR
usually means a dead time of less than 1 second.
In power transmission systems it is common practise to apply single and/or three
phase, single-shot Auto-Reclosing. In Sub-transmission and Distribution systems
tripping and auto-reclosing are usually three-phase. The mode of automatic-reclosing
varies however. Single-shot and multi-shot are in use. The first shot can have a short
delay, HSAR, or a longer delay, DAR. The second and following reclosing shots have
a rather long delay. When multiple shots are used the dead time must harmonize with
the breaker duty-cycle capacity.
Automatic-reclosing is usually started by the line protection and in particular by
instantaneous tripping of such protection. The auto-reclosing function can be
198
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Evolving fault where the fault during the dead-time spreads to another phase.
The other two phases must then be tripped and a three phase dead-time and autoreclose initiated
Permanent fault
Fault during three phase dead-time
Auto-reclose out of service or CB not ready for an auto-reclosing cycle
Prepare three phase tripping is then used to switch the tripping to three phase. This
signal is generated by the auto-recloser and connected to the trip function block and
also connected outside the IED through IO when a common auto-recloser is provided
for two sub-systems. An alternative signal Prepare 1 Phase tripping is also provided
and can be used as an alternative when the autorecloser is shared with another
subsystem. This provides a fail safe connection so that even a failure in the IED with
the auto-recloser will mean that the other sub-system will start a three-phase trip.
A permanent fault will cause the line protection to trip again when it recloses in an
attempt to clear the fault.
The auto-reclosing function allows a number of parameters to be adjusted.
Some examples:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
199
Section 4
IED application
Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set OFF and ON by a setting parameter
and by external control. Parameter Operation= OFF, or On sets the function OFF and
ON. In setting Operation=ExternalCtrl OFF and On control is made by input signal
pulses, e.g. from the control system or from the binary input (and other systems).
When the function is set ON and operative (other conditions such as CB closed and
CB Ready are also fulfilled), the output SETON is activated (high). When the function
is ready to accept a reclosing start.
The usual way to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it at tripping by line
protection by applying a signal to the input START. Starting signals can be either
General Trip signals or only the conditions for Differential, Distance protection Zone
1 and Distance protection Aided trip. In some cases also Directional Earth fault
function Aided trip can be connected to start an Auto-Reclose attempt.
In cases where one wants to differentiate three-phase auto-reclosing open time,
(dead time) for different power system configuration or at tripping by different
protection stages, one can also use the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing).
When initiating STARTHS, the auto-reclosing open time for three-phase shot 1, t1
3PhHS is used.
A number of conditions need to be fulfilled for the start to be accepted and a new
auto-reclosing cycle to be started. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:
a) CBREADY, CB ready for a reclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b)
CBPOS to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and start was
applied, c) No signal at input INHIBIT, i.e. no blocking or inhibit signal present. After
the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is set. It
can be interrupted by certain events, like an Inhibit signal.
200
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Blocking of the Auto-Reclose
Auto-Reclose attempts are expected to take place only in the event of transient faults
on the own line. The Auto-Recloser must be blocked for the following conditions:
Depending of the starting principle (General Trip or only Instantaneous trip) adopted
above the delayed and back-up zones might not be required. Breaker failure local and
remote must however always be connected.
Up to four different time settings can be used for the first shot, and one extension
time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto-reclosing open
time, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an autoreclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-reclosing open
time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection
with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase reclosing is
used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed autoreclosing without Synchrocheck, t1 3PhHS, available for use when required. It is
activated by the STARTHS input.
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal
shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. In such a case there can be a significant time
difference in fault clearance at the two ends of the line. A longer auto-reclosing open
time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter
Extended t1=On and the input PLCLOST.
In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly because of fault clearance.
The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. A longer trip signal extends
the auto-reclosing open time by tExtended t1. If Extended t1=Off, a long trip signal
interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.
Reclosing programs
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
201
Section 4
IED application
FirstShot=3ph (normal setting for a single 3 phase shot)
3-phase reclosing, one to five shots according to setting NoOfShots. The output
Prepare three-phase trip PREP3P is always set (high). A trip operation is made as a
three-phase trip at all types of fault. The reclosing is as a three-phase Reclosing as in
mode 1/2/3ph described below. All signals, blockings, inhibits, timers, requirements
etc. are the same as in the example described below.
FirstShot=1/2/3ph (normal setting for a 1/3 phase Auto reclose with Trip
modules (TR) in 1/3PhasePole trip)
1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing first shot, followed by 3-phase reclosing shots,
if selected. Here, the auto-reclosing function is assumed to be "On" and "Ready". The
breaker is closed and the operation gear ready (operating energy stored). Input
START (or STARTHS) is received and sealed-in. The output READY is reset (set
to false). Output ACTIVE is set.
If TR2P is low and TR3P is low (1-phase trip): The timer for 1-phase reclosing
open time is started and the output 1PT1 (1-phase reclosing in progress) is
activated. It can be used to suppress pole disagreement trip and earth-fault
protection during the 1-phase open interval.
If TR2P is high and TR3P is low (2-phase trip): The timer for 2-phase reclosing
open time is started and the output 2PT1 (2-phase reclosing in progress) is
activated.
If TR3P is high (3-phase trip): The timer for 3-phase auto-reclosing open time,
t1 3Ph or t1 3PhHS is started and output 3PT1 (3-phase auto-reclosing shot 1 in
progress) is set.
While any of the auto-reclosing open time timers are running, the output INPROGR
is activated. When the "open time" timer runs out, the respective internal signal is
transmitted to the output module for further checks and to issue a closing command
to the circuit breaker.
When a CB closing command is issued the output prepare 3-phase trip is set. When
issuing a CB closing command a reclaim timer tReclaim is started. If no tripping
takes place during that time the auto-reclosing function resets to the Ready state
and the signal ACTIVE resets. If the first reclosing shot fails, a 3-phase trip will be
initiated and 3-phase reclosing can follow, if selected.
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
phase reclosing can follow, if selected. A maximum of four additional shots can be
done (according to the NoOfShots parameter). At 2-phase trip (TR2P high and TR3P
low), the operation is similar to the above. But, if the first reclosing shot fails, a 3phase trip will be issued and the auto-reclosing will be blocked. No more shots are
attempted! The expression 1*2ph should be understood as Just one shot at 2-phase
reclosing During 3-phase trip (TR2P low and TR3P high) the auto-reclosing will be
blocked and no reclosing takes place.
At 1-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosing shot fails, a
3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosing will follow, if selected.At 2-phase
or 3-phase trip, the operation is similar to the above. But, if the first reclosing shot
fails, a 3-phase trip command will be issued and the auto-reclosing will be blocked.
No more shots take place! 1*2/3ph should be understood as Just one shot at 2-phase
or 3-phase reclosing.
At 1-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosing shot fails, a
3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosing will follow, if selected.At 2-phase
or 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosing shot fails,
a 3-phase trip will be issued and the auto-reclosing will be blocked. No more shots
take place! 1*2/3ph should be understood as Just one shot at 2-phase or 3-phase
reclosing.
Table 64:
First Shot
1st shot
2nd-5th shot
3ph
3ph
3ph
1/2/3ph
1ph
3ph
2ph
3ph
--
3ph
3ph
--
1/2ph
1ph
3ph
2ph
3ph
--
--
--
1ph + 1*2ph
1ph
3ph
2ph
--
--
--
--
1ph
3ph
2ph
3ph
3ph
--
1ph
3ph
2ph
--
3ph
--
1/2ph + 1*3ph
1ph + 1*2/3ph
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
203
Section 4
IED application
A start of a new reclosing cycle is blocked during the set reclaim time after the
selected number of reclosing shots have been made.
The auto-reclose mode can be selected by use of the available logic function blocks.
Below is an example where the choice of mode is done from a symbol on the local
HMI through selector switch function block with only 3 phase or 1/3 phase mode,
but alternatively there can e.g. be a physical selector switch on the front of the panel
which is connected to a binary to integer function block (B16I).
If the PSTO input is used, connected to the Local-Remote switch on the LHMI, the
choice can also be from the station HMI system, typically ABB Microscada through
IEC 61850 communication.
The connection example for selection of the auto-reclose mode is shown in . Selected
names are just examples but note that the symbol on LHMI can only show three signs.
SL01(180,100)
SLGGIO
INTONE
3
1/3
PSTO
AR01(2401,8)
SMBRREC_79
NAME1
SWPOSN
MODEINT
NAME2
en07000119.vsd
Figure 89:
The Reclaim timer tReclaim defines the time it takes from issue of the reclosing
command, until the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this
time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when
the CB closing command is given.
Transient fault
After the Reclosing command the reclaim timer keeps running for the set time. If no
tripping occurs within this time, tReclaim, the Auto-Reclosing will reset. The CB
204
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
remains closed and the operating gear recharges. The input signals CBPOS and
CBREADY will be set
If a new trip occurs, and a new input signal START or TRSOTF appears, after the
CB closing command, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The
timers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the set number of
Reclosing shots further shots may be made or the Reclosing sequence is ended. After
reclaim timer time-out the Auto-Reclosing function resets, but the CB remains open.
The CB closed information through the input CBPOS is missing. Thus the reclosing
function is not ready for a new reclosing cycle. Normally the signal UNSUCCL
appears when a new trip and start is received after the last reclosing shot has been
made and the Auto-Reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets after reclaim
time. The unsuccessful signal can also be made to depend on CB position input.
The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer
tUnsucCl should be set too. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and
does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time
tUnsucCl. The Unsuccessful output can e. g. be used in Multi-Breaker arrangement
to cancel the Auto-Reclosing function for the second breaker if the first breaker closed
onto a persistent fault. It can also be used to generate a Lock-out of manual closing
until the operator has reset the lock-out, see separate section.
Lock-Out initiation
In many cases there is a requirement that a Lock-out is generated when the AutoReclosing attempt fails. This is done with logic connected to the in- and outputs of
the Auto-Reclose function and connected to Binary IO as required. Many alternative
ways of performing the logic exist depending on whether manual closing is
interlocked in the IED, whether an external physical Lock-out relay exists and
whether the reset is hardwired, or carried out by means of communication. There are
also different alternatives regarding what shall generate Lock-out. Examples of
questions are:
In figures 90 and 91 the logic shows how a closing Lock-out logic can be designed
with the Lock-out relay as an external relay alternatively with the lock-out created
internally with the Manual closing going through the Synchro-check function. An
example of Lock-out logic.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
205
Section 4
IED application
OR
AR
BJ-TRIP
INHIBIT
SOTF-TRIP
UNSUCCL
OR
SMBO
Lock-out
RXMD1
11
BFP
TRBU
21
12
CLOSE COMMAND
en05000315.vsd
Figure 90:
BJ-TRIP
OR
AR
INHIBIT
SOTF-TRIP
UNSUCCL
OR
TR
SETLKOUT
CLLOUT
BFP
SOFTWARE
OR IO RESET
BJTRIP
RESET LOCK-OUT
RSTLOUT
AND
OR
SMBO
MAN CLOSE
AR CLOSE
SYNC
AUTO STOP
OR
CLOSE COMMAND
MAN ENOK
en05000316.vsd
Figure 91:
Evolving fault
206
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The second fault which can be single phase is tripped three phase because trip module
(TR) in the IED has an evolving fault timer which ensures that second fault is always
tripped three phase. For other types of relays where the relays do not include this
function the output PREP3PH (or the inverted PERMIT1PH) is used to prepare the
other sub-system for three phase tripping. This signal will, for evolving fault
situations be activated a short time after the first trip has reset and will thus ensure
that new trips will be three phase.
4.7.1.2
Setting guidelines
Configuration
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
207
Section 4
IED application
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
209
Section 4
IED application
UNSUCCL
Indicates unsuccessful reclosing.
CLOSECB
Connect to a binary output for circuit-breaker closing command.
READY
Indicates that the Auto-reclosing function is ready for a new and complete reclosing
sequence. It can be connected to the zone extension of a line protection should
extended zone reach before automatic reclosing be necessary.
1PT1 and 2PT1
Indicates that 1-phase or 2-phase automatic reclosing is in progress. It is used to
temporarily block an earth-fault and/or pole disagreement function during the 1-phase
or 2-phase open interval.
3PT1,-3PT2,-3PT3,-3PT4 and -3PT5
Indicates that 3-phase automatic reclosing shots 1-5 are in progress. The signals can
be used as an indication of progress or for own logic.
PREP3P
Prepare 3-phase trip is usually connected to the trip block to force a coming trip to
be a 3-phase one. If the function cannot make a single- or two-phase reclosing, the
tripping should be three-phase.
PERMIT1P
Permit 1-phase trip is the inverse of AR-PREP1P. It can be connected to a binary
output relay for connection to external protection or trip relays. In case of a total loss
of auxiliary power, the output relay drops and does not allow 1-phase trip. If needed,
the signal can be inverted by a contact of the output relay breaking.
WFMASTER
Wait from master is used in high priority units to hold back reclosing of the low
priority unit during sequential reclosing. Refer to the recommendation for multibreaker arrangements in figure 94.
Other outputs
The other outputs can be connected for indication, disturbance recording etc. as
required.
210
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
IOM
IOM
AR
INPUT
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
PROTECTION
xxxx-TRIP
>1
SOTF-TRIP
ZM1--TRIP
>1
ON
OFF
F BLKON
T
BLOCKOFF
INHIBIT
CBREADY
CBPOS
PLCLOST
F
RESET
F
F
START
STARTHS
SKIPHS
TRSOTF
F
F
T
SYN-AUTOOK
F
F
THOLHOLD
TR2P
TR3P
OUTPUT
BLOCKED
SETON
INPROGR
ACTIVE
UNSUCCL
SUCCL
CLOSECB
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
PERMIT1P
PREP3P
READY
1PT1
2PT1
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER
en04000135.vsd
Figure 92:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
211
Section 4
IED application
IOM
IOM
AR-
INPUT
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
PROTECTION
xxxx-TRIP
SOTF-TRIP
ZM1--TRIP
ON
OFF
F
BLKON
T
BLOCKOFF
INHIBIT
CBREADY
CBPOS
PLCLOST
F
STARTHS
SKIPHS
TRSOTF
>1
F
TRIP-TR2P
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CLOSECB
PERMIT1P
xx
xx
xx
xx
RESET
START
>1
OUTPUT
BLOCKED
SETON
INPROGR
ACTIVE
UNSUCCL
SUCCL
PREP3P
READY
1PT1
2PT1
TRIP-P3PTR
>1
TEF-BLOCK
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
THOLHOLD
TR2P
TR3P
SYNC
TRIP-TR3P
SYN-AUTOOK
F
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER
en04000136.vsd
Figure 93:
212
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Terminal Master
Priority = High
AR
ON
OFF
BLKON
BLOCKOFF
INHIBIT
RESET
PLCLOST
BLOCKED
SETON
INPROGR
ACTIVE
UNSUCCL
SUCCL
READY
START
STARTHS
SKIPHS
CLOSECB
PERMIT1P
PREP3P
THOLHOLD
TRSOTF
CBREADY
CBPOS
SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
CB1
CB2
1PT1
2PT1
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
WFMASTER
Terminal Slave
Priority = Low
AR
ON
OFF
BLKON
BLOCKOFF
INHIBIT
RESET
PLCLOST
START
STARTHS
SKIPHS
TRSOTF
THOLHOLD
BLOCKED
SETON
INPROGR
ACTIVE
UNSUCCL
SUCCL
READY
CLOSECB
PERMIT1P
PREP3P
1PT1
2PT1
3PT1
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
CBREADY
CBPOS
SYNC
WAIT
WFMASTER
*) Other input/output signals as in previous single
breaker arrangements
Figure 94:
en04000137.vsd
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
213
Section 4
IED application
Operation
The operation of the Auto-reclose function can be switched on and off. The setting
external control makes it possible to switch it on or off using an external switch via
IO or communication ports.
NoOfShots, Number of reclosing shots
In power transmission 1 shot is mostly used. In most cases one reclosing shot is
sufficient as the majority of arcing faults will cease after the first reclosing shot. In
power systems with many other types of faults caused by other phenomena, for
example wind, a greater number of reclose attempts (shots) can be motivated.
First shot and reclosing program
There are six different possibilities in the selection of reclosing programs. What type
of reclosing to use for the different kinds of faults depends on the power system
configuration and on the users practices and preferences. When the circuit-breakers
only have three-phase operation, then three-phase reclosing has to be chosen. This is
usually the case in subtransmission and distribution lines. Three-phase tripping and
reclosing for all types of faults is also widely accepted in completely meshed power
systems. In transmission systems with few parallel circuits, single-phase reclosing
for single-phase faults is an attractive alternative for maintaining service and system
stability.
Auto-reclosing open times, dead times
Single-phase auto-reclosing time: A typical setting is t1 1Ph = 800ms. Due to the
influence of energized phases the arc extinction may not be instantaneous. In long
lines with high voltage the use of shunt reactors in the form of a star with a neutral
reactor improves the arc extinction.
Three-phase shot 1 delay: For three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing (HSAR) a
typical open time is 400 ms. Different local phenomena, such as moisture, salt,
pollution etc. can influence the required dead time. Some users apply delayed autoreclosing (DAR) with delays of 10 s or more. The delay of reclosing shot 2 and
possible later shots are usually set at 30 s or more. A check that the CB duty cycle
can manage the selected setting must be done. The setting can in some cases be
restricted by national regulations. For multiple shots the setting of shots 2-5 must be
longer than the circuit breaker duty cycle time.
Extended t1 and tExtended t1, Extended auto-reclosing open time for shot 1.
The communication link in a permissive (not strict) line protection scheme, for
instance a power line carrier (PLC) link, may not always be available. If lost, it can
result in delayed tripping at one end of a line. There is a possibility to extend the autoreclosing open time in such a case by use of an input to PLCLOST, and the setting
parameters. Typical setting in such a case: Extended t1 = ON and tExtended t1 = 0.8
s.
tSync, Maximum wait time for synchronizationsynchronism check
The time window should be coordinated with the operate time and other settings of
the synchronization check function. Attention should also be paid to the possibility
214
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
of a power swing when reclosing after a line fault. Too short a time may prevent a
potentially successful reclosing. A typical setting may be 2.0 s.
tTrip, Long trip pulse
Usually the trip command and start auto-reclosing signal reset quickly as the fault is
cleared. A prolonged trip command may depend on a CB failing to clear the fault. A
trip signal present when the CB is reclosed will result in a new trip. Depending on
the setting Extended t1 = Off or On a trip/start pulse longer than the set time tTrip
will either block the reclosing or extend the auto-reclosing open time. At a setting
somewhat longer than the auto-reclosing open time, this facility will not influence
the reclosing. A typical setting of tTrip could be close to the auto-reclosing open time.
tInhibit, Inhibit resetting delay
A typical setting is tInhibit = 5.0 s to ensure reliable interruption and temporary
blocking of the function. Function will be blocked during this time after the tinhibit
has been activated.
tReclaim, Reclaim time
The reclaim time sets the time for resetting the function to its original state, after
which a line fault and tripping will be treated as an independent new case with a new
reclosing cycle. One may consider a nominal CB duty cycle of for instance, O-0.3sec
CO- 3 min. CO. However the 3 minute (180 s) recovery time is usually not critical
as fault levels are mostly lower than rated value and the risk of a new fault within a
short time is negligible. A typical time may be tReclaim = 60 or 180 s dependent of
the fault level and breaker duty cycle.
StartByCBOpen = Off, On
The normal setting is Off. It is used when the function is started by protection trip
signals Follow CB = Off, On The usual setting is Follow CB = Off. The setting ON
can be used for delayed reclosing with long delay, to cover the case when a CB is
being manually closed during the auto-reclosing open time before the autoreclosing function has issued its CB closing command.
tCBClosedMin
A typical setting is 5.0 s. If the CB has not been closed for at least this minimum time,
a reclosing start will not be accepted.
CBAuxContType, CB auxiliary contact type = NormOpen, NormClosed
(Normally Open, Normally Closed)
It shall be set to correspond to the CB auxiliary contact used. A NormOPen contact
is recommended in order to generate a positive signal when the CB is in the closed
position.
CBReadyType = CO or OCO, Type of CB ready signal connected
The selection depends on the type of performance available from the CB operating
gear. At setting OCO (CB ready for an Open Close Open cycle), the condition
is checked only at the start of the reclosing cycle. The signal will disappear after
tripping, but the CB will still be able to perform the C-O sequence. For the selection
CO (CB ready for a Close Open cycle) the condition is also checked after the set
auto-reclosing dead time. This selection has a value first of all at multi-shot reclosing
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
215
Section 4
IED application
to ensure that the CB is ready for a C-O sequence at shot 2 and further shots. During
single-shot reclosing, the OCO selection can be used. A breaker shall according to
its duty cycle always have storing energy for a CO operation after the first trip. (IEC
56 duty cycle is O-0.3secCO-3minCO).
tPulse, Breaker closing command pulse duration
The pulse should be long enough to ensure reliable operation of the CB. A typical
setting may be tPulse=200 ms. A longer pulse setting may facilitate dynamic
indication at testing, e.g. in the CAP program Debug mode. In CBs without antipumping relays, the setting Cut Pulse = ON can be used to avoid repeated closing
operation when reclosing onto a fault. A new start will then cut the ongoing pulse.
BlockUnsuc
Setting of whether an Unsuccessful Auto-Reclose attempt shall set the Auto-Reclose
in Block. If used the inputs BLOCKOFF must be configured to unblock the function
after an unsuccessful Reclosing attempt.Normal setting is Off.
UnsucClByCBCheck, Unsuccessful closing by CB check = NoCBCheck,
CBCheck and tUnsucCl
The normal setting is NoCBCheck. The auto-reclosing unsuccessful event is then
decided by a new trip within the reclaim time after the last reclosing shot. If one wants
to get the UNSUCCL (Unsuccessful closing) signal in the case the CB does not
respond to the closing command, CLOSECB, one can set UnsucClByCBCheck=
CBCheck and set tUnsucCl for instance to 1.0 s.
Priority and time tWaitForMaster
In single CB applications, one sets Priority = None. At sequential reclosing the
function of the first CB, e.g. near the busbar, is set Priority = High and for the second
CB Priority = Low. The maximum waiting time, tWaitForMaster of the second CB
is set longer than the auto-reclosing open time and a margin for synchronism check
at the first CB. Typical setting is tWaitForMaster=2sec.
AutoCont and tAutoContWait, Automatic continuation to the next shot if the
CB is not closed within the set time
The normal setting is AutoCont = OFF. The tAutoContWait is the length of time the
AR waits to see if the breaker is closed when AutoCont is set to On. Normally the
setting can be tAutoContWait = 2 sec.
4.7.1.3
Setting parameters
216
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 65:
Parameter
REB 670
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
External ctrl
On
External ctrl
Off, ExternalCtrl, On
ARMode
3 phase
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
1/2/3ph
The AR mode
selection e.g. 3ph,
1/3ph
t1 1Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
t1 3Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000
t1 3PhHS
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
tReclaim
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Duration of the
reclaim time
tSync
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tCBClosedMin
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
tUnsucCl
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Priority
None
Low
High
None
Priority selection
between adjacent
terminals None/Low/
High
tWaitForMaster
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
217
Section 4
IED application
Table 66:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
NoOfShots
1
2
3
4
5
Max number of
reclosing shots 1-5
StartByCBOpen
Off
On
Off
To be set ON if AR is
to be started by CB
open position
CBAuxContType
NormClosed
NormOpen
NormOpen
CBReadyType
CO
OCO
CO
t1 2Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
t2 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t3 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t4 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t5 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Extended t1
Off
On
Off
tExtended t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
tInhibit
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
CutPulse
Off
On
Off
Follow CB
Off
On
Off
AutoCont
Off
On
Off
tAutoContWait
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
218
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.7.2
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnsucClByCBChk
NoCBCheck
CB check
NoCBCheck
Unsuccessful closing
signal obtained by
checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl
Off
On
Off
Block AR at
unsuccessful
reclosing
ZoneSeqCoord
Off
On
Off
Coordination of down
stream devices to
local prot unit's AR
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SLGGIO
4.7.2.1
Application
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block, as it is also
known) is used within the CAP configuration tool in order to get a selector switch
functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware
selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions
operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance
issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector
switches eliminate all these problems.
The SLGGIO function block has two operating inputs (UP and DOWN), one blocking
input (BLOCK) and one operator position input (PSTO). The normal way a selector
switch is connected would be in accordance with fig.:
This is a minimal configuration, allowing for selector switch operation both from the
LHMI and from external sources (switches), via the IED binary inputs. It also allows
the operation from remote (like the station computer). The POS_NUM is an integer
value output, giving the actual output number. In this particular example, this is a
selector switch with 10 positions. Since the number of positions of the switch can be
established by settings (see below), one must be careful in coordinating the settings
with the configuration (if one sets the number of positions to x in settings for
example, there will be only the first x outputs available from the block in the
configuration). Also the frequency of the (UP or DOWN) pulses should be lower than
the setting tPulse.
From the LHMI, there are two modes of operating the switch: from the menu and
from the SLD. An example of these two types of operation is given in this document:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
219
Section 4
IED application
4.7.2.2
Setting guidelines
The following settings are available for the Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation function:
Operation: Sets the operation of the function On or Off;
noOfPositions: Sets the number of positions in the switch (max. 32)- this setting
influence the behaviour of the switch when changes from the last to the first position;
outputType: Steady or Pulsed;
operatePulseLenght: In case of a pulsed output, it gives the length of the pulse (in
seconds);
timeDelay: The delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and
the output activation;
stopAtExtreme: Sets the behavior of the switch at the end positions if set to 0, when
pressing UP while on first position, the switch will jump to the last position; when
pressing DOWN at the last position, the switch will jump to the first position; when
set to 1, no jump will be allowed;
4.7.2.3
Setting parameters
Table 67:
Parameter
4.7.3
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
NrPos
32
2 - 32
Number of positions
in the switch
OutType
Pulsed
Steady
Steady
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate pulse
duration, in [s]
tDelay
0.000 - 60000.000
0.010
0.000
StopAtExtremes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
VSGGIO
220
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.7.3.1
Application
The VS function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose
function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general purpose
switch. This function can be used for both acquiring an external switch position
(through the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs) and represent it through the single line
diagram symbols (or use it in the configuration through the outputs POS1 and POS2)
as well as a command function (controlled by the PSTO input), giving switching
commands through the CMD_POS12 and CMD_POS21 outputs.
The output POSITION is an integer output, showing the actual position (POS1, POS2,
INTERMEDIATE or BAD STATE) through an integer number (03).
An example where the VS switch is configured to switch auto reclose onoff from a
button symbol on the HMI is shown in figure 95. The I and OClose and Open buttons
on LHMI are used for onoff operations.
I140
OUT INV INPUT
VS01(180,100)
VSGGIO
INTONE
OFF
ON
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2
NAM_POS1
NAM_POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
ON
OFF
AR01(2401,8)
SMBRREC_79
SETON
en07000112.vsd
Figure 95:
The switch is also provided with IEC 61850 communication so it can be controlled
from SA system as well.
An output can not be used to process the function.
4.7.3.2
Setting guidelines
The VS function can generate pulsed or steady commands (by setting the Mode
parameter one can change this). When pulsed commands are generated, the length of
the pulse can be set using the tPulse parameter. Also, being accessible on the single
line diagram (SLD), this function block has two control modes (settable through
CtlModel): Direct (called DirNorm) and Select-Before-Execute (called SBOEnh).
4.7.3.3
Setting parameters
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
221
Section 4
IED application
Table 68:
Parameter
4.7.4
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
Dir Norm
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Operation mode
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Command pulse
lenght
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
DPGGIO
4.7.4.1
Application
The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical outputs to other systems or
equipment in the substation. The three outputs are named OPEN, CLOSE and
VALID, since this function block is intended to be used as a position indicator
block in interlocking and reservation station-wide logics. For additional information
see also "".
4.7.4.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings available for the user for DPGGIO. However, to get the signals
sent by DPGGIO one must use the engineering tools described in chapter
"Engineering of the IED".
4.7.4.3
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.7.5
222
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
SPC8GGIO
4.7.5.1
Application
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring
in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic
configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability
to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the
result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary
inputs and SPGGIO function blocks, see figure 96.
SC01SPC8GGIO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
BLOCK
PSTO
en07000143.vsd
Figure 96:
4.7.5.2
SC function block
Setting guidelines
The SC function block has the setting Operation, turning the function operation On/
Off. There are two settings for every command output (totally 8):
Latchedx: deciding if the command signal for output x is latched (steady) or pulsed.
tPulsex: if the previous setting was set on pulsed, then timePulsex will set the length
of the pulse (in seconds).
4.7.5.3
Setting parameters
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
223
Section 4
IED application
Table 69:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
Latched1
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched2
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched3
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse3
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched4
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse4
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched5
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse5
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched6
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse6
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched7
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse7
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched8
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse8
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
4.8
Logic
4.8.1
4.8.1.1
Application
A high number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.
224
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.8.1.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings for AND gates, OR gates, inverters or XOR gates.
For normal On/Off delay and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set
from the CAP configuration tool.
Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed
on drop-out) always have a common setting value. Pulse length settings are
independent of one another for all pulse circuits.
For controllable gates, settable timers and SR flip-flops with memory, the setting
parameters are accessible via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager
(PCM 600).
Configuration
Logic is configured using the CAP configuration tool.
Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs according to
a fixed sequence with different cycle times.
For each cycle time, the function block is given an serial execution number. This is
shown when using the CAP configuration tool with the designation of the function
block and the cycle time, for example, TMnn-(1044, 6). TMnn is the designation of
the function block, 1044 is the serial execution number and 6 is the cycle time.
The execution of different function blocks within the same cycle is determined by
the order of their serial execution numbers. Always remember this when connecting
two or more logical function blocks in series.
Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle
time to function blocks with a slow cycle time.
Remember to design the logic circuits carefully and always check the
execution sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional
time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent
errors, for example, race between functions.
4.8.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 70:
Parameter
T
Table 71:
Parameter
T
REB 670
Step
0.001
Default
Unit
0.000
Description
Time delay of function
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Step
0.001
Default
Unit
0.010
Description
Time delay of function
225
Section 4
IED application
Table 72:
Parameter
Memory
Table 73:
Parameter
Operation
Table 74:
Parameter
4.8.2
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operating mode of
the memory function
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation Off/On
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
FixedSignals
4.8.2.1
Application
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.
4.8.2.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.8.3
226
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
4.8.3.1
Application
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion block) is used within
the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. It can
be used for example, to connect logical output signals from a function (like distance
protection) to integer inputs from another function (like line differential protection).
The B16I does not have a logical node mapping.
4.8.3.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.8.4
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
B16IGGIO
4.8.4.1
Application
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic
node representation block) is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B16IGGIO can receive an integer from a station
computer for example, over IEC61850. These functions are very useful when you
want to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by
inputting an integer number. The B16IGGIO has a Logical Node mapping in the
IEC61850.
4.8.4.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.8.5
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
227
Section 4
IED application
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
4.8.5.1
Application
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion block) is used within
the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. It can
be used for example, to connect logical output signals from a function (like distance
protection) to integer inputs from another function (like line differential protection).
The IB16 does not have a logical node mapping.
4.8.5.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.8.6
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
IB16GGIO
4.8.6.1
Application
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic
node representation block) is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive an integer from a station
computer for example, over IEC61850. These functions are very useful when you
want to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by
inputting an integer number. The IB16GGIO has a Logical Node mapping in the
IEC61850.
4.8.6.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
228
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.9
Monitoring
4.9.1
Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRx-
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CVMMXU
P, Q, S, I, U, f
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CMMXU
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
VNMMXU
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
VMMXU
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
229
Section 4
IED application
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CMSQI
I1, I2, I0
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
VMSQI
4.9.1.1
U1, U2, U0
Application
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via
IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power,
reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient
production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the
system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and
control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the
measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of
the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection
function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact
of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.
230
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system
quantities:
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual
hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential
quantities:
4.9.1.2
Setting guidelines
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM
600.
The parameters for the Measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are set via the local
HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
Operation: Off/On. Every function instance (SVRx, CPxx, VNxx, VP0x, CSQxx,
VSQx) can be taken in operation (On) or out of operation (Off). Default setting is
Off.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
231
Section 4
IED application
The following general settings can be set for the Service Value functions (SVR).
PowAmpFact: Amplitude factor to scale power calculations. The setting range is
0.000-6.000. Default setting is 1.000, which also is a typical setting.
PowAngComp: Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U. The
setting range is 180 degrees. Default setting is 0 degree, which also is a typical
setting.
Mode: Selection of measured current and voltage. There are 9 different ways of
calculating monitored three-phase values depending on the available VT inputs
connected to the IED. See parameter group setting table. Default setting expects
complete VT information (L1,L2,L3).
k: Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I. The setting range is
0.0-1.0. Default setting is 0.0 i.e. no filtering, which also is a typical setting.
UGenZeroDb: Minimum level of voltage in % of UBase used as indication of zero
voltage (zero point clamping). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb calculated
S, P, Q and PF will be zero. The setting range is 1-100%. Default setting is 5%.
IGenZeroDb: Minimum level of current in % of Ibase used as indication of zero
current (zero point clamping). If measured value is below IGenZeroDb calculated S,
P, Q and PF will be zero. The setting range is 1-100%. Default setting is 5%.
UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised
object. The setting range is 0.05-2000 kV. Default setting is 400 kV.
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised
object. The setting range is 1-99999 A. Default setting is 3000 A.
UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of
Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0.
IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of
Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0.
IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where
Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is 0.
The following general settings can be set for the phase current monitoring
functions (CP).
IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of
Ir, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0.
IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where
Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is 0.
232
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The following general settings can be set for the phase-phase voltage monitoring
functions (VP).
UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of
Ur, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10%. Default setting is 0.
UAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ur,
where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100. The setting range is 10 degrees. Default setting is
0.
The following general settings can be set for all monitored quantities included in
the functions (SVR, CP, VN, VP, CSQ and VSQ).
Xmin: Minimum value for analog signal X (X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3,
UL1-3UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0)) set directly in applicable measuring unit.
Xmax: Maximum value for analog signal X.
XZeroDb: Zero point clamping. A signal value less than XZeroDb is forced to zero.
The setting range is 0-100000 in steps of 0.001% related to measuring range. Default
setting is 0. Observe the related zero point clamping settings in Setting group N for
SVR (UGenZeroDb and IGenZeroDb). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb and/
or IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero and these settings will override
XZeroDb.
XRepTyp: Reporting type. Cyclic (Cyclic), amplitude deadband (Dead band) or
integral deadband (Int deadband). The reporting interval is controlled by the
parameter XDbRepInt. Default setting is Cyclic.
XDbRepInt: Reporting deadband setting. Cyclic reporting is the setting value and is
reporting interval in seconds. Amplitude deadband is the setting value in % of
measuring range. Integral deadband setting is the integral area, i.e. measured value
in % of measuring range multiplied by the time between two measured values. Default
setting is 10.
XHiHiLim: High-high limit. Set in applicable measuring unit. The setting range is
10000000000 in steps of 0.001. Default setting is 900106 (i.e 900 MW/MVar/
MVA).
XHiLim: High limit. Default setting is 800106 (i.e 800 MW/MVar/MVA).
XLowLim: Low limit. Default setting is -800106.
XLowLowLim: Low-low limit. Default setting is -900106.
XLimHyst: Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits. The setting
range is 0-100 in steps of 0.001. Default setting is 5%.
All phase angles are presented in relation to defined reference channel. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".
Calibration curves
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
233
Section 4
IED application
It is possible to calibrate the functions (SVR, CP, VN and VP) to get class 0.5
presentations of currents, voltages and powers. This is accomplished by amplitude
and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The
compensation curve will have the characteristic for amplitude and angle
compensation of currents as shown in figure 97 (example). The first phase will be
used as reference channel and compared with the curve for calculation of factors. The
factors will then be used for all related channels.
% of Ir
Amplitude
compensation
-10
IAmpComp5
Measured
current
IAmpComp30
IAmpComp100
30
% of Ir
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
-10
Degrees
100
Angle
compensation
-10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of Ir
-10
en05000652.vsd
Figure 97:
Calibration curves
Setting examples
For each of them detail explanation and final list of selected setting parameters values
will be provided.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
234
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Measurement function application for a 400 kV OHL
Single line diagram for this application is given in the figure 98:
400kV Busbar
800/1 A
400 0,1
/
kV
3
3
400kV OHL
Figure 98:
en05000374.vsd
In order to monitor, supervise and calibrate the active and reactive power as indicated
in the above figure it is necessary to do the following:
1.
2.
3.
Table 75:
Selected
value
Comments
Operation
Operation Off/On
On
PowAmpFact
1.000
PowAngComp
0.0
Mode
L1, L2, L3
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
235
Section 4
IED application
CAP & PST name Short Description (60 char)
Selected
value
Comments
0.00
UGenZeroDb
25
IGenZeroDb
UBase
400.00
IBase
800
Table 76:
Selected
value
Comments
PMin
Minimum value
-750
PMax
Minimum value
750
PZeroDb
3000
PRepTyp
Reporting type
db
PDbRepInt
PHiHiLim
600
PHiLim
500
PLowLim
-800
PLowLowlLim
-800
PLimHyst
Table 77:
Selected
value
IAmpComp5
0.00
IAmpComp30
0.00
IAmpComp100
0.00
UAmpComp5
0.00
Comments
236
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
CAP & PST name Short Description (60 char)
Selected
value
UAmpComp30
0.00
UAmpComp100
0.00
IAngComp5
0.00
IAngComp30
0.00
IAngComp100
0.00
Comments
110kV Busbar
200/1
31,5 MVA
110/36,75/(10,5) kV
Yy0(d5)
500/5
UL1L2
35 / 0,1kV
35kV Busbar
Figure 99:
en05000375.vsd
In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in the above figure, it
is necessary to do the following:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
237
Section 4
IED application
1.
2.
3.
Set correctly all CT and VT and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef
(see section "Analog inputs") data using the Parameter Setting Tool for analog
input channels
Connect in Application Configuration Tool measurement function to LV side
CT & VT inputs
Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table:
Selected
value
Comment
Operation
Operation Off/On
On
PowAmpFact
1.000
PowAngComp
180.0
Mode
L1L2
0.00
UGenZeroDb
25
IGenZeroDb
UBase
35.00
IBase
495
238
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
220kV Busbar
300/1
100 MVA
242/15,65 kV
Yd5
15 / 0,1kV
UL1L2 , UL2L3
P
100MVA
15,65kV
4000/5
en05000376.vsd
Figure 100:
In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in the above figure, it
is necessary to do the following:
1.
2.
3.
Set correctly all CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel
PhaseAngleRef (see section "Analog inputs") using the Parameter Setting Tool
for analog input channels
Connect in Application Configuration Tool measurement function to the
generator CT & VT inputs
Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table:
Selected
value
Comment
Operation
Operation Off/On
On
PowAmpFact
1.000
PowAngComp
0.0
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
239
Section 4
IED application
CAP & PST name Short description (60 char)
4.9.1.3
Selected
value
Comment
Mode
Arone
0.00
UGenZeroDb
25%
IGenZeroDb
UBase
15,65
IBase
3690
Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM
600.
Table 78:
Parameter
Unit
SLowLim
Range
0.000 10000000000.000
Step
0.001
0.000
VA
Description
Low limit (physical
value)
SLowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
VA
SMin
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
VA
Minimum value
SMax
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
VA
Maximum value
SRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-1000000000.000
Minimum value
PMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
Maximum value
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-1000000000.000
VAr
Minimum value
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off / On
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
240
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
QMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000000000.000
VAr
Maximum value
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
Mode
L1, L2, L3
Arone
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
L1, L2, L3
Selection of
measured current and
voltage
PowAmpFact
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
1.000
Amplitude factor to
scale power
calculations
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
0.1
0.0
Deg
Angle compensation
for phase shift
between measured I
&U
0.00 - 1.00
0.01
0.00
PFMin
-1.000 - 0.000
0.001
-1.000
Minimum value
PFMax
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum value
PFRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
400000.000
Maximum value
URepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
241
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
FrMin
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Hz
Minimum value
FrMax
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
70.000
Hz
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 79:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
SZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
SHiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
VA
SHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000
VA
SLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
PZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
PHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
PHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000
PLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800000000.000
PLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900000000.000
PLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
242
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
QHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900000000.000
VAr
QHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800000000.000
VAr
QLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800000000.000
VAr
QLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900000000.000
VAr
QLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
PFZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
UGenZeroDb
1 - 100
PFHiHiLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
3.000
IGenZeroDb
1 - 100
PFHiLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
2.000
PFLowLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
-2.000
PFLowLowLim
-3.000 - 3.000
0.001
-3.000
PFLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
UDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
UZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
UHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
UHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
ULowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
ULowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
243
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
ULimHyst
Range
0.000 - 100.000
Step
0.001
5.000
Description
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
IZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
IHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000
ILowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
ILowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
ILimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
FrZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
FrHiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
65.000
Hz
FrHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
63.000
Hz
FrLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
47.000
Hz
FrLowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
45.000
Hz
FrLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
244
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg
Table 80:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IL1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
IL1Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
IL2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
IL2Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
IL3DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
245
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IL3Max
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
IL3RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IL3AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
Type
Table 81:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IL1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IL1HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
IL1HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL1LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg
IL1Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Deg
IL1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
IL2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IL2HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
IL2HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
IL2LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
246
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
IL2LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL2Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IL2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
IL3ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IL3HiHiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
900.000
IL3HiLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
800.000
IL3LowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL3LowLowLim
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
IL3Min
0.000 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
IL3LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
Table 82:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL12DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Mode On /
Off
UL12ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
UBase
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
UL12HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
UL12HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UL12LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
247
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL12LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL12Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL12Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL12RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL12LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
UL12AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
UL12AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
UL23ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
UL23HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
UL23HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
UL23LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
UL23LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
UL23Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL23Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL23RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL23LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
248
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
REB 670
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UL23AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
UL23AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
UL31ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
UL31HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
UL31HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
UL31LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
UL31LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
UL31Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
UL31Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
UL31RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UL31LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
UL31AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
UL31AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
249
Section 4
IED application
Table 83:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
3I0DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
3I0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
3I0HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
3I0HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000
3I0LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
3I0LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
3I0Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
3I0Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
3I0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
I1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
I1HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
I1HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000
I1LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
250
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
I1LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
I1Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
I1Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
I2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
I2HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
900.000
I2HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
800.000
I2LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-800.000
I2LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-900.000
I2Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
I2Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
1000.000
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
251
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Default
Unit
I2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 84:
Parameter
Range
Step
Description
Step
Default
Unit
Description
3U0DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
3U0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
3U0HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
3U0HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
3U0LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
3U0LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
3U0Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
3U0Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
3U0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
3U0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Mode On /
Off
3U0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
252
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
U1DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
U1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
U1HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
U1HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
U1LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
U1LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
U1Min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
U1Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
U1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
U1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2DbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
U2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
1/100
0%
U2HiHiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
460000.000
U2HiLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
U2LowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
380000.000
U2LowLowLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
350000.000
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
253
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.9.2
Default
Unit
U2Min
Range
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
Step
0.001
0.000
Description
Minimum value
U2Max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
450000.000
Maximum value
U2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
U2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
10
s,%,
%s
U2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
CNTGGIO
4.9.2.1
Application
This function has six counters which are used for storing the number of times each
counter has been activated. All six counters have a common blocking function used,
for example, when testing. All sex counters has a common reset and a common
function.
4.9.2.2
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
4.9.3
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
Event
254
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.9.3.1
Application
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected
to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA
communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.
4.9.3.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the event function are set from the PST parameter setting
tool, part of PCM 600.
EventMaskCh_1 - 16
The inputs can be set individually as:
NoEvents
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect
LONChannelMask/SPAChannelMask
Definition of which part of the event function block that shall generate events:
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
MinInterval_1 - 16
A time interval between cyclic events can be set individually for each input channel.
This can be set between 0.0 s to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s. It should normally be set
to 0, i.e. no cyclic communication.
MaxEvPerSec
Three times this setting value gives the maximum burst quota per input channel. A
reasonable value as default should be 10 events/s which gives 30 events/s as a
maximum sustained event rate per channel.
It is important to set the time interval for cyclic events in an optimized
way to minimize the load on the station bus.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
255
Section 4
IED application
4.9.3.3
Setting parameters
Table 85:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SPAChannelMask
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Off
LONChannelMask
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Off
EventMask1
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask2
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask3
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask4
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask5
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask6
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask7
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask8
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
256
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
EventMask9
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask10
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask11
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask12
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask13
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask14
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask15
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask16
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 7
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
257
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
4.9.4
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MinRepIntVal8
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting
interval input 16
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
RANGE_XP
4.9.4.1
Application
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO
(MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values
can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit
and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to
be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary
signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or
above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable
logic.
4.9.4.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settable parameters for the measured value expander block function.
4.9.5
258
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ABRDRE
4.9.5.1
Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system it is very important to gather information on fault currents,
voltages and events. It is also important having a continuous event-logging to be able
to monitor in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the
Disturbance Report function and facilitate a better understanding of the power system
behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to
explain a disturbance, basis for change of relay setting plan, improve existing
equipment etc. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when
planning for and designing new installations, i.e. a disturbance recording could be a
part of Functional Analysis (FA).
The Disturbance Report (DRP), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function blocks i.e.
maximum 30 external analog, 10 internal derived analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance Report function is a common name for several functions i.e.
Indications (IND), Event recorder (ER), Event List (EL), Trip Value recorder (TVR),
Disturbance recorder (DR).
The function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting
conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, the
disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it
can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one
reason or another. The function can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance
recorder since there is more functionality in the Disturbance Report function then
usual.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events,
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The Local Human Machine Interface
(LHMI) is used to get information about the recordings, and the disturbance report
files may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and
further analysis using the Disturbance Handling tool.
If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), according to IEC 61850,
disturbance recorder and fault location information will be available on the bus. The
same information will be obtainable if IEC 60870-5-103 is used.
4.9.5.2
Setting guidelines
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
259
Section 4
IED application
The setting parameters for the Disturbance Report function (DRP) are set via the
LHMI or the tool included in PCM 600.
It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals
or signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical in all functions
i.e. Disturbance recorder (DR), Event Recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip Value
Recorder (TVR) and Event List function (EL).
User-defined names of binary and analog input signals can be set using the
configuration and parameter setting tool. The analog and binary signals appear with
their user-defined names. The name is used in all related functions (IND, EL, ER,
TVR and DR).
Figure ""Figure 101 shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included
functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary
input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input
function blocks (DRA1-3). The DR function acquires information from both DRAx
and DRBx.
DRA1-- 4-
Disturbance Report
DRP- -
A4RADR
RDRE
Analog signals
Trip Value Rec
DRB1-- 6-
Binary signals
Disturbance
Recorder
B6RBDR
Event List
Event Recorder
Indications
en05000160.vsd
Figure 101:
For the Disturbance Report function there are a number of settings which also
influences the sub-functions.
Three LED indications placed above the LCD screen makes it possible to get quick
status information about the IED. The information:
260
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Green LED:
Steady light
In Service
Flashing light
Internal failure
Dark
No power supply
Yellow LED:
Steady light
Flashing light
Red LED:
Steady light
Operation
The operation of the Disturbance Report function has to be set On or Off. If Off is
selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, and none sub-function will
operate (the only general parameter that influences EL).
Operation=Off:
Operation=On:
Disturbance report are stored, disturbance data can be read from the LHMI and
from a PC using PCM 600.
LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.
Every recording will get a number (0 to 999) which is used as identifier (LHMI,
disturbance handling tool and IEC 61850). An alternative recording identification is
date, time and sequence number. The sequence number is automatically increased by
one for each new recording and is reset to zero at midnight. The maximum number
of recordings stored in the IED is 100 and the oldest will be overwritten when a new
one arrives (FIFO).
Recording times
The different recording times for the disturbance report are set (the pre-fault time,
post-fault time, and limit time). These recording times affect all sub-functions more
or less but not the EL function.
Prefault recording time (PreFaultRecT) is the recording time before the starting point
of the disturbance. The setting should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for
the estimation of pre-fault values in the Trip Value Recorder function.
Postfault recording time (PostFaultRecT) is the maximum recording time after the
disappearance of the trig-signal (does not influence the TVR-function).
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
261
Section 4
IED application
Recording time limit (TimeLimit) is the maximum recording time after trig. The
parameter limits the recording time if some trigging condition (fault-time) is very
long or permanently set (does not influence the TVR-function).
Post retrigger (PostRetrig) can be set to On or Off. Makes it possible to choose
performance of the Disturbance Report function if a new trig signal appears in the
post-fault window.
PostRetrig = Off
The function is insensitive for new trig signals during post fault time.
PostRetrig = On
The function completes current report and starts a new complete report i.e. the latter
will include:
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected among internal logical and binary input
signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals.
For each of the 96 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a
trigger for the start of the disturbance report and if the trigger should be activated on
positive (1) or negative (0) slope.
OperationN Disturbance Report may trig for binary input N (On) or not (Off).
TrigLevelN: Trig on positive (Trig on 1) or negative (Trig on 0) slope for binary input
N.
Func103N: Function type number (0-255) for binary input N according to
IEC-60870-5-103, i.e. 128: Distance protection, 160: overcurrent protection, 176:
transformer differential protection and 192: line differential protection.
Info103N: Information number (0-255) for binary input N according to
IEC-60870-5-103, i.e. 69-71: Trip L1-L3, 78-83: Zone 1-6.
See also description in the chapter IEC 60870-5-103.
262
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected among internal analog and analog input
signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals.
The analog trigger of the Disturbance report is not affected if analog input M is to be
included in the disturbance recording or not (OperationM= On/Off).
NomValueM: Nominal value for input M
OverTrigOpM, UnderTrigOpM: Over or Under trig operation, Disturbance Report
may trig for high/low level of analog input M (On) or not (Off).
OverTrigLevelM, UnderTrigLevelM: Over or under trig level, Trig high/low level
relative nominal value for analog input M in percent of nominal value.
Sub-function parameters
Consideration
The density of recording equipment in power systems is increasing, since the number
of modern IEDs, where recorders are included, is increasing. This leads to a vast
number of recordings at every single disturbance and a lot of information has to be
handled if the recording functions don"t have proper settings. The goal is to optimize
the settings in each IED to be able to capture just valuable disturbances and to
maximize the number that"s possible to save in the IED.
The recording time should not be longer than necessary (PostFaultrecT and
TimeLimit).
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
263
Section 4
IED application
Should the function record faults only for the protected object or cover more?
How long is the longest expected fault clearing time?
Is it necessary to include reclosure in the recording or should a persistent fault
generate a second recording (PostRetrig)?
Binary signals: Use only relevant signals to start the recording i.e. protection trip,
carrier receive and/or start signals.
Analog signals: The level triggering should be used with great care, since
unfortunate settings will cause enormously number of recordings. If nevertheless
analog input triggering is used, chose settings by a sufficient margin from normal
operation values. Phase voltages are not recommended for trigging.
Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere are linked to the information on
a report. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and VT
ratios.
4.9.5.3
Setting parameters
Table 86:
Parameter
264
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
PreFaultRecT
0.05 - 1.00
0.01
0.10
Pre-fault recording
time
PostFaultRecT
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
0.5
Post-fault recording
time
TimeLimit
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
PostRetrig
Off
On
Off
Post-fault retrig
enabled (On) or not
(Off)
ZeroAngleRef
1 - 30
Ch
OpModeTest
Off
On
Off
Operation mode
during test mode
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Table 87:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation01
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue01
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp01
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp01
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
Operation02
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue02
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp02
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe02
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp02
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200
Operation03
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue03
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp03
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp03
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
Operation04
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
265
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
NomValue04
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp04
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp04
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200
Operation05
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue05
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp05
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp05
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200
Operation06
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue06
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp06
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp06
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200
Operation07
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue07
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
266
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigOp07
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp07
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe07
0 - 5000
200
Operation08
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue08
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp08
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp08
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200
Operation09
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue09
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp09
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp09
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200
Operation10
Off
On
Off
Operation On/Off
NomValue10
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp10
Off
On
Off
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
267
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigLe10
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp10
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200
Table 88:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation31
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue31
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp31
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe31
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp31
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe31
0 - 5000
200
Operation32
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue32
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp32
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe32
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp32
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe32
0 - 5000
200
Operation33
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue33
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
268
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigOp33
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe33
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp33
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe33
0 - 5000
200
Operation34
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue34
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp34
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe34
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp34
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe34
0 - 5000
200
Operation35
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue35
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp35
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe35
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp35
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe35
0 - 5000
200
Operation36
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue36
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp36
Off
On
Off
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
269
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UnderTrigLe36
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp36
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe36
0 - 5000
200
Operation37
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue37
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp37
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe37
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp37
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe37
0 - 5000
200
Operation38
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue38
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp38
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe38
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp38
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe38
0 - 5000
200
Operation39
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue39
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp39
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe39
0 - 200
50
270
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
OverTrigOp39
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe39
0 - 5000
200
Operation40
Off
On
Off
Operation On/off
NomValue40
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp40
Off
On
Off
UnderTrigLe40
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp40
Off
On
Off
OverTrigLe40
0 - 5000
200
Table 89:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation01
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel01
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa01
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED01
Off
On
Off
Operation02
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel02
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa02
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED02
Off
On
Off
Operation03
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel03
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
271
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IndicationMa03
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED03
Off
On
Off
Operation04
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel04
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa04
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED04
Off
On
Off
Operation05
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel05
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa05
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED05
Off
On
Off
Operation06
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel06
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa06
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED06
Off
On
Off
Operation07
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel07
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa07
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED07
Off
On
Off
Operation08
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel08
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa08
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED08
Off
On
Off
272
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation09
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel09
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa09
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED09
Off
On
Off
Operation10
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel10
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa10
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED10
Off
On
Off
Operation11
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel11
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa11
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED11
Off
On
Off
Operation12
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel12
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa12
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED12
Off
On
Off
Operation13
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel13
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa13
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED13
Off
On
Off
Operation14
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel14
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
273
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
IndicationMa14
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED14
Off
On
Off
Operation15
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel15
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa15
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED15
Off
On
Off
Operation16
Off
On
Off
TrigLevel16
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa16
Hide
Show
Hide
SetLED16
Off
On
Off
FUNT1
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT2
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT3
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT4
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT5
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT6
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT7
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT8
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT9
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT10
0 - 255
FunT
274
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNT11
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT12
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT13
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT14
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT15
0 - 255
FunT
FUNT16
0 - 255
FunT
INFNO1
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO2
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 2
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO3
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 3
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO4
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO5
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 5
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO6
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO7
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 7
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO8
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO9
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO10
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO11
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
275
Section 4
IED application
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
INFNO12
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO13
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO14
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO15
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
INFNO16
0 - 255
INFN
O
Information number
for binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)
4.9.6
4.9.6.1
Application
From an overview perspective, continuous event-logging is a useful system
monitoring instrument and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder
functions.
The event list (EL), always included in the IED, logs all selected binary input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain of up to 1000 timetagged events stored in a ring-buffer where, if the buffer is full, the oldest event is
overwritten when a new event is logged.
The difference between the event list (EL) and the event recorder (ER) function is
that the list function continuously updates the log with time tagged events while the
recorder function is an extract of events during the disturbance report time window.
The event list information is available in the IED and the user can use the Local
Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information. The list can also be
uploaded from the PCM 600 tool.
4.9.6.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Event list function (EL) are a part of the Disturbance
report settings.
It is possible to event handle up to 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals
from binary input channels. These signals are identical with the binary signals
recorded by the disturbance recorder.
There is no dedicated setting for the EL function.
276
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
4.9.7
Indications (RDRE)
4.9.7.1
Application
Fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is important. Binary signals that have changed status during a
disturbance are an example of this. This information is used primarily in the short
term (e.g. immediate disturbance analysis, corrective actions) to get information via
the LHMI in a straightforward way without any knowledge of how to handle the IED.
There are three LED"s on the LHMI (green, yellow and red) which will display status
information about the IED (in service, internal failure etc.) and the Disturbance Report
function (trigged).
The Indication function (IND), always included in the IED, shows all selected binary
input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have been activated
during a disturbance. The status changes are logged during the entire recording time,
which depends on the set of recording times (pre-, post-fault and limit time) and the
actual fault time. The indications are not time-tagged.
The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the
IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to view the
information.
4.9.7.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for LED"s and the Indication function (IND) are a part of the
Disturbance Report settings.
Available signals are identical with the binary signals recorded by the disturbance
report. It is possible to use all binary input signals for the Indication function on the
LHMI, but it is not recommended since the general view will be lost. The intention
is to point out some important signals, not to many, to be shown. If a more thorough
analysis is to be done information from the Event Recorder should be used.
To be able to control the red LED in the LHMI:
SetLEDN: Set red LED on LHMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes status.
For the IND function there are a number dedicated settings:
IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of
that particular input, will be fetched and shown on the LHMI. If not set (Hide), status
change will not be indicated.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
277
Section 4
IED application
4.9.8
4.9.8.1
Application
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This
information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. disturbance analysis,
corrective actions) and in the long term (e.g. disturbance analysis, statistics and
maintenance, i.e. Functional Analysis).
The event recorder (ER), always included in the IED, logs all selected binary input
signals connected to the Disturbance Report function. Each recording can contain up
to 150 time-tagged events. The events are logged during the total recording time,
which depends on the set of recording times (pre-, post-fault and limit time) and the
actual fault time. During this time, the first 150 events for all 96 binary signals are
logged and time-tagged.
The event recorder information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in
the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the
information. The information is included in the disturbance recorder file, which may
be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further
analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
4.9.8.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Event Recorder (ER) function are a part of the
Disturbance Report settings.
It is possible to event handle up to 96 binary signals, either internal signals or signals
from binary input channels. These signals are identical to the binary signals recorded
by the disturbance report.
For the ER function there is no dedicated setting.
4.9.9
4.9.9.1
Application
Fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances such as fault currents and
voltage faults in the power system is vital. This information is used for different
purposes in the short perspective (e.g. fault location, disturbance analysis, corrective
actions) and the long term (e.g. disturbance analysis, statistics and maintenance, i.e.
Functional Analysis).
278
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 4
IED application
The trip value recorder (TVR), always included in the IED, calculates the values of
all selected external analog input signals (channel 1-30) connected to the Disturbance
Report function. The estimation is performed immediately after finalizing each
recording and available in the Disturbance Report. The result is magnitude and phase
angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The information is used as input to the fault location function (FL), if included in the
IED and in operation.
The trip value recorder information is available for each of the recorded disturbances
in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get
the information. The information is included in the disturbance recorder file, which
can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further
analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
4.9.9.2
Setting guidelines
The trip value function (TVR) setting parameters are a part of the Disturbance Report
settings.
For the TVR function there is one dedicated setting:
ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal to use as phase angle
reference for all other input signals. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage
input signal e.g. a line or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30).
4.9.10
4.9.10.1
Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about fault current, voltage, binary
signal and other disturbances in the power system is very important. This is
accomplished by the Disturbance Recorder function and facilitates a better
understanding of the behavior of the power system and related primary and secondary
equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides
valuable information that can be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of
IED setting plan, improvement of existing equipment etc. This information can also
be used in a longer perspective when planning for and designing new installations,
i.e. a disturbance recording could be a part of Functional Analysis (FA).
The Disturbance Recorder (DR), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
from all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function blocks i.e.
maximum 30 external analog, 10 internal (derived) analog and 96 binary signals.
The function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting
conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, the
disturbance recorder is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it
can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
279
Section 4
IED application
The disturbance recorder information is saved for each of the recorded disturbances
in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get
some general information about the recordings. The disturbance recording
information is included in the disturbance recorder files, which may be uploaded to
the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) for further analysis using the
Disturbance Handling tool. The information is also available on a station bus
according to IEC 61850 and according to IEC 60870-5-103.
4.9.10.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the Disturbance Recorder function (DR) is a part of the
Disturbance Report settings.
It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 96 binary signals, either internal signals
or signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical with the
signals recorded by the other functions in the Disturbance Report function i.e. Event
Recorder (ER), Indication (IND) and Trip Value Recorder (TVR) function.
For the DR function there is one dedicated setting:
OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder (On)
or not (Off). Other disturbance report settings, such as Operation and TrigLevel for
binary signals, will also influence the disturbance recorder.
280
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Section 5
Station communication
About this chapter
This chapter describes the communication possibilities in a SA-system.
5.1
Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one
or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation
(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:
5.2
5.2.1
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
281
Section 5
Station communication
Engineering
Workstation
SMS
Station HSI
Base System
Gateway
CC
Printer
KIOSK 1
KIOSK 3
KIOSK 2
en06000195.vsd
Figure 102:
Gateway
GOOSE
IED
A
Control
IED
A
Protection
IED
A
Control and protection
IED
A
Control
IED
A
Protection
en05000734.vsd
Figure 103:
282
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
5.2.2
Setting guidelines
There are only two settings related to the IEC 6185081 protocol, available to the
user in PST:
Operation User can set it to On or Off.
GOOSE has to be set to the Ethernet link where GOOSE traffic shall be send and
received.
IEDName That specific IED name in the IEC 6185081 system However, there are
specific settings for the network interface (Ethernet) that are directly related to the
IEC 6185081 (but not only) in case this protocol is used. The IEDName is not
settable through PST. The IEDName is given by the name of the IED in the PCM
Navigation structure. The name shown as the "IEDName" parameter is a read-only
feedback of the current name of the IED on IEC61850.
IEC 6185081 specific data (logical nodes etc.) per included function in an IED can
be found iin a separate document, refer to section "Related documents".
5.2.3
5.2.3.1
Application
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical output to other systems
or equipment in the substation. It has one visible input, that should be connected in
CAP.
5.2.3.2
Setting guidelines
There are no settings available for the user for SPGGIO. However, to get the signals
sent by SPGGIO one must use the engineering tools described in chapter
"Engineering of the IED".
5.2.3.3
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
5.2.4
5.2.4.1
Application
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog
output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the
same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement
supervision on that value.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
283
Section 5
Station communication
5.2.4.2
Setting guidelines
The settings available for the MVGGIO function allows the user to choose a deadband
and a zero deadband for the monitored signal. Values within the zero deadband are
considered as zero.
The high and low limit settings provides limits for the high-high-, high, normal, low
and low-low ranges of the measured value. The actual range of the measured value
is shown on the range output of the MVGGIO function block. When a measured value
expander block (RANGE_XP) is connected to the range output, the logical outputs
of the RANGE_XP are changed accordingly.
5.2.4.3
Setting parameters
Table 90:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MV db
1 - 300
10
Type
MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
500
m%
MV hhLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
90.000
MV hLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
80.000
High limit
MV lLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-80.000
Low limit
MV llLim
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-90.000
MV min
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
-100.000
Minimum value
MV max
-10000000000.00
010000000000.000
0.001
100.000
Maximum value
MV dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
5.2.5
Setting parameters
284
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Table 91:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off/On
GOOSE
Front
OEM311_AB
OEM311_CD
OEM311_AB
5.3
5.3.1
Application
Control Center
Station HSI
MicroSCADA
Gateway
Star coupler
RER 111
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000663.vsd
Figure 104:
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This
enables communication with the IED 670s through the LON bus from the operators
workplace, from the control center and also from other IEDs via bay-to-bay horizontal
communication.
The fiber optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fiber
optic cables.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
285
Section 5
Station communication
Table 92:
Plastic fiber
Cable connector
ST-connector
snap-in connector
Cable diameter
62.5/125 m
1 mm
1000 m
10 m
Wavelength
820-900 nm
660 nm
Transmitted power
Receiver sensitivity
The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application,
but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting
the star coupler to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from MicroSCADA, the application
library LIB 670 is required.
The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB 520 high-voltage process
package, which is a part of the Application Software Library within MicroSCADA
applications.
The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in IED 670s. This
module contains the process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate the process
database for the control application in MicroSCADA.
Use the LNT, LON Network Tool to set the LON communication. This is a software
tool applied as one node on the LON bus. In order to communicate via LON, the IEDs
need to know which node addresses the other connected IEDs have, and which
network variable selectors should be used. This is organized by the LNT.
The node address is transferred to the LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter
ServicePinMsg=YES. The node address is sent to the LNT via the LON bus, or the
LNT can scan the network for new nodes.
The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s.This
can be changed by the LNT.
5.3.2
Setting parameters
286
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Table 93:
Parameter
Operation
Table 94:
Parameter
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation
TimerClass
Slow
Normal
Fast
Slow
Timer class
5.4
5.4.1
Application
The communication protocol SPA is available for the IED 670 products as an option
and as an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103. The same communication port as for IEC
60870-5-103 is used.
SPA communication is applied when using the front communication port. For this
purpose, no serial communication module is required in the IED. Only the PCM 600
software in the PC and a crossed-over Ethernet cable for front connection is required.
When communicating with a PC see figure 105, using the rear SPA port on the serial
communication module (SLM), the only hardware required for a local monitoring
system is:
A remote monitoring system for communication over the public telephone network
also requires telephone modems and a remote PC.
The software required for a local monitoring system is PCM 600, and for a remote
monitoring system it is PCM 600 in the remote PC only.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
287
Section 5
Station communication
Remote monitoring
system with
PCM600
Local monitoring
system with
PCM600
IED670
Teleph
one
modem
IED670
Teleph
one
modem
Optical to electrical
converter, e.g. SPA-ZC 22
or Fiberdata modem
Figure 105:
IED670
en05000672.vsd
When communicating with a PC connected to the utility substation LAN, via WAN
and the utility office LAN (see figure 2), and using the rear Ethernet port on the optical
Ethernet module (OEM), the only hardware required for a station monitoring system
is:
WAN
Substation LAN
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000715.vsd
Figure 106:
The SPA communication is mainly used for the Station Monitoring System. It can
include different numerical relays/terminals/IEDs with remote communication
possibilities. Connection to a personal computer (PC) can be made directly (if the PC
is located in the substation) or by telephone modem through a telephone network with
ITU (former CCITT) characteristics or via a LAN/WAN connection.
288
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
glass
plastic
Functionality
The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The
communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the IED is a slave and the
PC is the master. Only one master can be applied on each fiber optic loop. A program
is required in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for
translation of the data that should be sent to the IED.
The specification of the SPA protocol V2.5 is available as a separate document, SPAbus Communication Protocol V2.5, 1MRS 750076-MTD EN
5.4.2
Setting guidelines
The setting parameters for the SPA communication are set via the local HMI.
The SPA and the IEC use the same rear communication port. To define the protocol
to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI. Refer to the Installation and
commissioning manual for setting procedure.
When the communication protocol has been selected, the power to the IED must be
switched off and on.
The most important settings in the IED for SPA communication are the slave number
and baud rate (communication speed). These settings are absolutely essential for all
communication contact to the IED.
These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel communication
and for front channel communication.
The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as the slave number
is unique within the used SPA loop.
The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between 300 and
38400 baud. The baud rate should be the same for the whole station, although different
baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baud rates in the same fibre optical loop
are used, consider this when making the communication setup in the communication
master, the PC.
For local fibre optic communication, 19200 or 38400 baud is the normal setting. If
telephone communication is used, the communication speed depends on the quality
of the connection and on the type of modem used. But remember that the IED does
not adapt its speed to the actual communication conditions, because the speed is set
on the HMI of the IED.
5.4.3
Setting parameters
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
289
Section 5
Station communication
Table 95:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on
serial line
Table 96:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on
serial line
Table 97:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
5.5
5.5.1
Application
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is available for the IED 670 products
as an option.
290
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
TCP/IP
Control Center
Station HSI
Gateway
Star coupler
RER 123
IED670
IED670
IED670
en05000660.vsd
Figure 107:
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Table 98:
glass
plastic
Functionality
Design
General
The protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of the following functions:
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
291
Section 5
Station communication
Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurands)
Fault location
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
Hardware
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal
Unit (RTU) in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is:
Optical fibres, glass/plastic Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU PC/RTU
Commands
The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in a
dedicated function blocks. These blocks have output signals for all available
commands according to the protocol.
Function block with defined IED functions in control direction, I103IEDCMD. This
block use PARAMETR as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.
Function block with pre defined functions in control direction, I103CMD. This block
includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.
Function block with user defined functions in control direction, I103UserCMD. These
function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private
range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each output signal.
Status
The events created in the IED available for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are based
on the:
292
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction, I103IED. This block
use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each input signal.
Function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction, I103UserDef.
These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in
the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each input
signal.
Function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor direction,
I103EF. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.
Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction,
I103FltDis. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal. This block
is suitable for distance protection function.
Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction,
I103FltStd. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each input signal.
This block is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, over-current and
earth-fault protection functions.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
293
Section 5
Station communication
Measurands
The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the
standard.
Function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals,
I103Meas.
Settings
Settings from the local HMI
The SPA and the IEC communication use the same rear port. To define the protocol
to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI under the menu:
Settings/General Settings/Communication/SLM Configuration/Rear optical SPAIEC port/Protocol selection for SPA or IEC103
When the communication protocols have been selected, the IED is automatically
restarted.
The settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following:
294
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
The settings for communication parameters slave number and baud rate can be found
on the local HMI at:
Settings/General Settings/Communication/SLM Configuration/Rear optical SPAIEC port/IEC60870-5-103
The slave number can be set to any value between 0 to 255.
The baud rate, the communication speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/s or 19200
bits/s.
Settings from the PCM 600 tool
Event
For each input of the Event function there is a setting for the information number of
the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and
255. In order to get proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks in the
event function shall be set to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event
mask shall be set to ON_SET.
In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description
of the Main Function type set on the local HMI.
Commands
As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with
eight output signals. Using the CAP 531 tool makes the configuration of these signals.
To realize the BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI,
the output BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected
to an input on an event function block. This input shall have the information number
20 (monitor direction blocked) according to the standard.
Disturbance Recordings
For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the
information number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to
any value between 0 and 255.
Furthermore there is a setting on each input of the Disturbance recorder function for
the function type. Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
295
Section 5
Station communication
EIA RS-485 is not supported. Glass or plastic fiber should be used. BFOC/2.5 is the
recommended interface to use (BFOC/2.5 is the same as ST connectors). ST
connectors are used with the optical power as specified in standard.
For more information please see the IEC standard IEC 60870-5-103.
5.5.2
Setting parameters
Table 99:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
SlaveAddress
0 - 255
30
Slave address
BaudRate
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on serial
line
RevPolarity
Off
On
On
Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTim
e
1.0 - 3600.0
0.1
5.0
Table 100:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 101:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
296
Step
1
Default
255
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Table 102:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 103:
Parameter
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
Step
Default
Unit
Description
PULSEMOD
0-1
Mode
Pulse mode
0=Steady, 1=Pulsed
0.200 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
INFNO_1
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 1 (1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 2 (1-255)
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 3 (1-255)
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 4 (1-255)
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 5 (1-255)
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 6 (1-255)
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 7 (1-255)
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for output 8 (1-255)
Table 104:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
INFNO_1
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 1
(1-255)
INFNO_2
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 2
(1-255)
INFNO_3
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 3
(1-255)
INFNO_4
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 4
(1-255)
INFNO_5
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 5
(1-255)
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
297
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
INFNO_6
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 6
(1-255)
INFNO_7
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 7
(1-255)
INFNO_8
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for binary input 8
(1-255)
Table 105:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 106:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 107:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 108:
Parameter
FUNTYPE
Table 109:
Parameter
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
Step
1
Default
160
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
Step
1
Default
128
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
Step
1
Default
1
Unit
FunT
Description
Function type (1-255)
Step
Default
Unit
Description
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
25
FunT
INFNO
1 - 255
InfNo
Information number
for measurands
(1-255)
RatedMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur2
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
298
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur4
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur5
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur6
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur7
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur8
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
RatedMeasur9
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Table 110:
Parameter
REB 670
Range
RatedMeasur3
Unit
RatedIL1
Range
1 - 99999
3000
RatedIL2
1 - 99999
3000
RatedIL3
1 - 99999
3000
RatedIN
1 - 99999
3000
Rated residual
current IN
RatedUL1
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
RatedUL2
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
RatedUL3
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
RatedUL1-UL2
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
400.00
kV
RatedUN
0.05 - 2000.00
0.05
230.00
kV
Rated residual
voltage UN
RatedP
0.00 - 2000.00
0.05
1200.00
MW
RatedQ
0.00 - 2000.00
0.05
1200.00
MVA
RatedF
50.0 - 60.0
10.0
50.0
Hz
Rated system
frequency
FUNTYPE
1 - 255
FunT
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Step
Description
299
Section 5
Station communication
5.6
5.6.1
Application
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the
CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the
DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the
BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON). The AUBI
function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary
Output point in DNP. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP. This object
contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate a AUBI
output point you send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip
or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On,
on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give you 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300
ms apart.
5.6.2
Setting guidelines
The AUBI function block has just one setting, (Operation: On/Off) enabling or
disabling the function. The name for each command signal can also be set under CAP.
These names will be seen in the DNP communication configuration tool, in the PCM
600.
5.6.3
Setting parameters
Table 111:
Parameter
Operation
Table 112:
Parameter
Operation
300
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation Off / On
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation mode Off /
On
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Table 113:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
Serial-Mode
Off
Operation mode
BaudRate
300 Bd
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
WireMode
Four-wire
Two-wire
Two-wire
Table 114:
Parameter
REB 670
Step
Default
Unit
Description
DLinkConfirm
Never
Sometimes
Always
Never
Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Data-link confirm
timeout in s
DLinkRetries
0 - 255
Data-link maximum
retries
tRxToTxMinDel
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Rx to Tx minimum
delay in s
DataBits
5-8
Data bits
StopBits
1-2
Stop bits
Parity
No
Even
Odd
Even
Parity
RTSEnable
No
Yes
No
RTS enable
tRTSWarmUp
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.050
tMaxRndDelBkOf
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
RS485 maximum
back-off random
delay in s
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
301
Section 5
Station communication
Table 115:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 116:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 117:
Parameter
302
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Table 118:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Off
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 119:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
303
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 120:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
Unsolicited response
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
Unsolicited response,
event class mask
304
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
Time synchronization
request after timeout
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
Table 121:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
305
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
306
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Table 122:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
Unsolicited response
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
Unsolicited response,
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
307
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
Time synchronization
request after timeout
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 123:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
308
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 124:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
Unsolicited response
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
Unsolicited response,
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
309
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
Time synchronization
request after timeout
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 125:
Parameter
Range
Description
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
310
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
REB 670
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
311
Section 5
Station communication
Table 126:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
Unsolicited response
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
Unsolicited response,
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
312
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
Time synchronization
request after timeout
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 127:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Operation
Off
ON
Off
Operation Off / On
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source
(master) address
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
255.255.255.255
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default
variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Object 2, default
variation
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Object 4, default
variation
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
313
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
2:BinCnt16EvWou
tT
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithF
T
4:AI16IntEvWithF
T
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithF
T
8:AI64FltEvWithF
T
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 128:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response
enabled
URSendOnline
No
Yes
No
Unsolicited response
sends when on-line
UREvClassMask
Off
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Off
Unsolicited response,
event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
314
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
tURRetryDelay
Range
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
1 - 3600
1800
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
Yes
Time synchronization
request after timeout
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection
timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
5.7
5.7.1
Application
Description
The single command, 16 signals (CD) is a common function and always included in
the IED.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
315
Section 5
Station communication
The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive commands either from a
substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That
receiving function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high
voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can
also be used. Together with the configuration logic circuits, the user can govern pulses
or steady output signals for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs.
Figure 108 shows an application example of how the user can, in an easy way, connect
the command function via the configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage
apparatus. This type of command control is normally carried out by sending a pulse
to the binary outputs of the IED. Figure 108 shows a close operation. An open
breaker operation is performed in a similar way but without the synchro-check
condition.
Single
command
function
CDxx
SingleCmdFunc
Close CB1
CMDOUTy
OUTy
Userdefined
conditions
Synchrocheck
&
en04000206.vsd
Figure 108:
Figure 109 and figure 110 show other ways to control functions, which require steady
On/Off signals. Here, the output is used to control built-in functions or external
devices.
316
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Single
command
function
CDxx
Function n
SingleCmdFunc
Function n
CMDOUTy
OUTy
en04000207.vsd
Figure 109:
Single
command
function
CDxx
SingleCmdFunc
Device 1
CMDOUTy
OUTy
Userdefined
conditions
&
en04000208.vsd
Figure 110:
5.7.2
Setting guidelines
The parameters for the single command, 16 signals, function (CD) are set via the local
HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
317
Section 5
Station communication
Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CMDOUTy which
includes the user defined name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the
outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.
5.7.3
Off, sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,
that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
Steady, sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
Pulse, gives a pulse with 100 ms duration, if a value sent from the station level
is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the
command function block may not have a cycle time longer than the cycle time
for the command function block.
Setting parameters
Table 129:
Parameter
Mode
Step
-
Default
Off
Unit
-
Description
Operation mode
5.8
5.8.1
Application
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from
other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/
inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control
purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with
other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with
16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
5.8.2
Setting guidelines
5.8.2.1
Settings
The parameters for the multiple command function are set via the Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600).
The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.
5.8.3
Setting parameters
318
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 5
Station communication
Table 130:
Parameter
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.050 - 200.000
0.001
11.000
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
tPulseTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Table 131:
Parameter
REB 670
Unit
tMaxCycleTime
Range
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
5.000
Maximum time
interval between
transmission of output
data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
Step
Description
319
320
Section 6
Remote communication
Section 6
Remote communication
About this chapter
This chapter describes the remote end data communication possibilities through
binary signal transferring.
6.1
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
BSDGGIO
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO
6.1.1
Application
IED 670s can be equipped with communication devices for line differential
communication and/or communication of binary signals between IEDs. The same
communication hardware is used for both purposes.
Communication between two IEDs geographically on different locations is a
fundamental part of the line differential function.
Sending of binary signals between two IEDs, one in each end of a power line is used
in teleprotection schemes and for direct transfer trips. In addition to this, there are
application possibilities like e.g. blocking/enabling functionality in the remote
substation, changing setting group in the remote IED depending on the switching
situation in the local substation etc.
When equipped with an LDCM, a 64 kbit/s communication channel can be connected
to the IED, which will then have the capacity of 192 binary signals to be
communicated with a remote IED. For RED 670 the number of binary signals is
limited to 8 because the line differential communication is included in the same
telegrams.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
321
Section 6
Remote communication
6.1.1.1
DC
L
CM
LD
CM
LD
CM
LD
en06000519.vsd
Figure 111:
The LDCM can also be used together with an external optical to galvanic G.703
converter or with an alternative external optical to galvanic X.21 converter as shown
in figure 112. These solutions are aimed for connections to a multiplexer, which in
turn is connected to a telecommunications transmission network (e.g. SDH or PDH).
Multiplexer
Multiplexer
Telecom. Network
*)
DC
L
L
*)
LD
CM
CM
DC
Figure 112:
When an external modem G.703 or X21 is used, the connection between LDCM and
the modem is made with a multimode fibre of max. 3 km length. The IEEE/ANSI
C37.94 protocol is always used between LDCM and the modem.
322
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 6
Remote communication
Alternatively, an LDCM with X.21 built-in converter and micro D-sub 15-pole
connector output can be used.
6.1.1.2
Figure 113:
As shown in figure 113, it is then possible to wire only the status for bays 01-08 to
L1-IED. After that the information about auxiliary contact status for switchgear
objects from these eight bays can be sent via LDCM modules to other two phases. In
the similar way information from other bays can be only wired to L2, respectively
L3 phase IED and then shared to the other two phases via LDCM communication.
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
323
Section 6
Remote communication
Typical LDCM communication delay between two IEDs is in order of 30-40 ms. It
shall be noted that for disconnector status this delay will not pose any practical
problems. However, time delay caused by LDCM communication can be crucial for
circuit breakers status. In such cases it is strongly recommended that at least the circuit
breaker closing command from every circuit breaker is directly wired to all three
phases/IEDs in order to minimize any risk for unwanted operation of the busbar
differential protection zones due to late inclusion of respective bay current into the
differential measuring circuit.
6.1.2
Setting guidelines
ChannelMode: This parameter can be set On or Off. Besides this, it can be set
OutOfService which signifies that the local LDCM is out of service. Thus, with this
setting, the communication channel is active and a message is sent to the remote IED
that the local IED has its communication out of service.
TerminalNo: This setting assigns a number to the local IED. Up to 256 IEDs can be
assigned unique numbers. For a line differential protection, maximum 6 IEDs can be
included. The possibility to use the large number of IED designations is reserved for
the case where a high security against incorrect addressing in multiplexed systems is
desired.
RemoteTermNo: This setting assigns a number to the remote IED.
DiffSync: Here the method of time synchronization, PingPong or GPS, for the line
differential function is selected.
GPSSyncErr: If GPS synchronization is lost, the synchronization of the line
differential function will continue during 16 s. based on the stability in the local IED
clocks. Thereafter the setting Block will block the line differential function or the
setting PingPong will make it continue by using the PingPong synchronization
method. It shall be noticed that using PingPong in this situation is only safe as long
as there is no risk of varying transmission asymmetry.
CommSync: This setting decides the Master/Slave relation in the communication
system and shall not be mistaken for the synchronization of line differential current
samples. When direct fibre is used, one LDCM is set as Master and the other one as
Slave. When a modem and multiplexer is used, the IED is always set as Slave, as the
telecommunication system will provide the clock master.
OptoPower: The setting LowPower is used for fibres 0 1 km and HighPower for
fibres >1 km.
TransmCurr: This setting decides which of 2 possible local currents that shall be
transmitted, or if and how the sum of 2 local currents shall be transmitted, or finally
if the channel shall be used as a redundant channel.
In a 1 breaker arrangement, there will be 2 local currents, and the earthing on the
CTs can be different for these. CT-SUM will transmit the sum of the 2 CT groups.
324
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 6
Remote communication
CT-DIFF1 will transmit CT group 1 minus CT group 2 and CT-DIFF2 will transmit
CT group 2 minus CT group 1.
CT-GRP1 or CT-GRP2 will transmit the respective CT group, and the setting
RedundantChannel makes the channel be used as a backup channel.
ComFailAlrmDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm. In communication
systems, route switching can sometimes cause interruptions with a duration up to 50
ms. Thus, a too short time delay setting might cause nuisance alarms in these
situations.
ComFailResDel: Time delay of communication failure alarm reset.
RedChSwTime: Time delay before switchover to a redundant channel in case of
primary channel failure.
RedChRturnTime: Time delay before switchback to a the primary channel after
channel failure.
AsymDelay: The asymmetry is defined as transmission delay minus receive delay. If
a fixed asymmetry is known, the PingPong synchronization method can be used if
the parameter AsymDelay is properly set. From the definition follows that the
asymmetry will always be positive in one end, and negative in the other end.
MaxTransmDelay: Data for maximum 40 ms transmission delay can be buffered up.
Delay times in the range of some ms are common. It shall be noticed that if data arrive
in the wrong order, the oldest data will just be disregarded.
CompRange: The set value is the current peak value over which truncation will be
made. To set this value, knowledge of the fault current levels should be known. The
setting is not overly critical as it considers very high current values for which correct
operation normally still can be achieved.
6.1.3
Setting parameters
Table 132:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
325
Section 6
Remote communication
Parameter
326
Range
Step
Default
Unit
Description
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode
when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
100
ms
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
20
ms
Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
600
us
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
300
us
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 6
Remote communication
Table 133:
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode
when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChann
el
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
100
ms
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
100
ms
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
100
ms
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
ms
Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
20
ms
Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
327
Section 6
Remote communication
Parameter
Step
Default
Unit
Description
200 - 2000
600
us
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
300
us
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off
Table 134:
Parameter
328
Range
MaxtDiffLevel
Step
Default
Unit
Description
ChannelMode
Off
On
OutOfService
On
Channel mode of
LDCM, 0=OFF,
1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on
remote terminal
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization
mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power
for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
10
ms
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
10
ms
InvertPolX21
Off
On
Off
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 7
Configuration
Section 7
Configuration
About this chapter
This chapter describes the IED configurations.
7.1
Introduction
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
REB 670
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
329
Section 7
Configuration
7.2.4
This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summation current
transformers.
7.2.5
This version is available in full 19 case. The IED is intended for busbar
protection applications in big substations where dynamic Zone Selection, quite
large number of binary inputs and outputs and many CT inputs are needed. The
IED includes two differential zones and twenty-four CT inputs.
This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summation current
transformers.
7.2.6
330
fully configured for the total available number of bays in each REB 670 variant
facility to take any bay out of service via built-in HMI or externally via binary
input
facility to block any of the two zones via built-in HMI or externally via binary
input
facility to block all bay trips via built-in HMI or externally via binary input, but
leaving all other function in service (i.e. BBP Zones, BFP and OCP where
applicable)
facility to externaly initiate built-in disturbance recorder
facility to connect external breaker failure backup trip signal from every bay
facility to connect external bay trip signal
This configuration includes just busbar protection for simple stations layouts (i.e.
One-and-a-half breaker, Double Breaker or Single Breaker stations). Additionaly
it can be used for double busbar-single breaker stations where disconnector
replica is done by using just b auxiliary contact from every disconnector and/or
circuit breakers. As a consequence no disconnector/breaker supervision will be
avavaible. It is as well possible to adapt this configuration by SMT to be used as
direct replacement of RED 521*1.0 terminals. This configuration is avaiable for
all five REB 670 variants (i.e. A20, A31, B20, B21 & B31). It shall be noted that
optional functions breaker failure protection RBRF, end fault protection and
overcurrent protection POCM can be ordered together with this configuration,
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 7
Configuration
but they will not be pre-configured! Thus these optional functions shall be
configured by the end user.
7.2.7
7.2.8
REB 670
This configuration includes BBP with breaker failure protection RBRF, end fault
protection and overcurrent protection POCM for double busbar-single breaker
stations, where Zone Selection is done by using a and b auxiliary contacts from
every disconnectors and/or circuit breakers. Thus full disconnector/breaker
supervision is avaiable. This configuration is avaiable for only three REB 670
variants (i.e. A31, B21 and B31).
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
331
332
Section 8
Glossary
Section 8
Glossary
About this chapter
This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB
technical documentation.
8.1
REB 670
Glossary
AC
Alternating current
A/D converter
ADBS
ADM
ANSI
AR
Autoreclosing
ArgNegRes
Setting parameter/ZD/
ArgDir
Setting parameter/ZD/
ASCT
ASD
AWG
BBP
Busbar protection
BFP
BIM
BOM
BR
BS
British standard
BSR
BST
C37.94
CAN
CAP 531
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
333
Section 8
Glossary
334
CB
Circuit breaker
CBM
CCITT
CCM
CCVT
Class C
CMPPS
CO cycle
Close-open cycle
Co-directional
COMTRADE
Contra-directional
CPU
CR
Carrier receive
CRC
CS
Carrier send
CT
Current transformer
CVT
DAR
Delayed auto-reclosing
DARPA
DBDL
DBLL
DC
Direct current
DFT
DIP-switch
DLLB
DNP
DR
Disturbance recorder
DRAM
DRH
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 8
Glossary
REB 670
DSP
DTT
EHV network
EIA
EMC
EMF
EMI
EnFP
ESD
Electrostatic discharge
FOX 20
FOX 512/515
Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus
G.703
GCM
GI
GIS
GOOSE
GPS
GSM
HDLC protocol
HFBR connector
type
HMI
HSAR
HV
High voltage
HVDC
IDBS
IEC
IEC 60044-6
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
335
Section 8
Glossary
336
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61850
IEEE
IEEE 802.12
IEEE P1386.1
IED
I-GIS
IOM
Instance
IP
IP 20
IP 40
IP 54
IRF
IRIG-B:
ITU
LAN
LIB 520
LCD
LDCM
LDD
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 8
Glossary
REB 670
LED
LNT
LON
MCB
MCM
MIM
Milli-ampere module
MPM
MVB
NCC
NUM
Numerical module
OCO cycle
Open-close-open cycle
OCP
Overcurrent protection
OEM
OLTC
OV
Over voltage
Overreach
PCI
PCM
PCM 600
PC-MIP
PISA
PMC
POTT
Process bus
Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM
PST
PT ratio
PUTT
RASC
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
337
Section 8
Glossary
338
RCA
REVAL
Evaluation software
RFPP
RFPE
RISC
RMS value
RS422
RS485
RTC
RTU
SA
Substation Automation
SC
SCS
SCT
SLM
SMA connector
SMS
SNTP
SPA
SRY
ST
Starpoint
SVC
TC
Trip coil
TCS
TCP
TCP/IP
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
REB 670
Section 8
Glossary
REB 670
TEF
TNC connector
Underreach
U/I-PISA
UTC
UV
Undervoltage
WEI
VT
Voltage transformer
X.21
3IO
3UO
Application manual
1MRK505181-UEN rev. B
339
340